Меню

Частотный преобразователь панасоник vf200 коды ошибок

  • Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric
  • Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic в сервисном центре
  • Ошибки частотного преобразователя Panasonic Electric
  • Коды ошибок частотного преобразователя Panasonic VF-0
  • Документация
  • Схемы подключения частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric
  • Настройка частотного преобразователя Panasonic Electric, программирование
  • Оставить заявку на ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric

Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric

Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric

Ремонт частотного преобразователя Panasonic Electric, впрочем, как и ремонт частотников других производителей имеет ряд особенностей в силу своего конструктива. Частотные преобразователи, точнее их начинка делятся на две части:

  • Аппаратная часть,
  • Программная часть.

Частотники данного производителя не являются исключением из правил, именно поэтому ремонт частотного преобразователя Panasonic Electric имеет точно такой же ряд особенностей, как и у других преобразователей.

Диагностировать ту или иную неисправность помогают коды ошибок частотного преобразователя, которые отображаются на небольшом дисплее, расположенном на лицевой панели привода. Коды ошибок частотного преобразователя Panasonic в зависимости от серии описаны в инструкции, пользователя которые можно скачать с нашего сайта.

Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic в Мургапе, как и любых других преобразователей, выпущенных под другими брендами, всегда начинается с аппаратной части, после успешного ремонта аппаратной части наступает очередь программной.

Настройка частотного преобразователя Panasonic также прописана в инструкции завода производителя, для каждой серии частотных преобразователей настройка будет индивидуальной, так как каждая линейка преобразователей решает свои собственные задачи, этим обусловливается широкая номенклатура данного промышленного оборудования.

Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic в сервисном центре

Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric

Компания «Кернел» производитремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic в Мургапе с 2002 года. За время существования компании наши сотрудники накопили колоссальный опыт в ремонте преобразователей частоты такого известного производителя как Panasonic Electric. Ремонт подобного промышленного оборудования ответственное и сложное занятие, требующие максимальной отдачи, профессионализма и максимально полной материальной базе.

Специалисты нашего сервисного центра максимальное внимание уделяют качеству исполнения ремонта, программирования и настройке промышленных преобразователей частоты, не зависимо от производителя данного промышленного оборудования. Именно поэтому мы смело даем гарантию на все выполненные работы шесть месяцев.

Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic в Мургапе производится исключительно с использованием оригинальных запасных частей, на компонентном уровне с применением высокотехнологичного диагностического оборудования, квалифицированным персоналом с инженерным образованием.

В случае выхода из строя преобразователя частоты на вашем производстве либо появились проблемы с приводом, которые вы не можете решить самостоятельно, мы всегда рады вам помочь. Специалисты нашего сервисного центра в минимальные сроки проведут глубокую диагностику с последующим ремонтом частотного преобразователя Panasonic Electric.

Инженеры сервисного центра выполняют качественный ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric всех серий, когда-либо выпускаемых компанией.

Серия ПЧ Типы частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric
Panasonic VF-0 BFV00022DK; BFV00042GK; BFV00042DK; BFV00072GK; BFV00072DK; BFV00152GK; BFV00152DK; BFV00074; BFV00154; BFV00224; BFV00224;
Panasonic VF-CE BFVCE0022A; BFVCE0032A; BFVCE0072A; BFVCE0152A; BFVCE0222A; BFVCE0074A; BFVCE0074A; BFVCE0074A; BFVCE0074A
Panasonic VF-7E BFV70022E; BFV70042E; BFV70072E; BFV70074E; BFV70152E; BFV70154E; BFV70222E; BFV70224E; BFV70372E; BFV70374E; BFV70022EBP; BFV70022EP; BFV70042EBP; BFV70042EP; BFV70072EBP; BFV70072EP; BFV70074EP; BFV70152EBP; BFV70152EP; BFV70154EP; BFV70222EBP; BFV70222EP; BFV70224EP; BFV70372EP; BFV70374EP
Panasonic VF-7F BFV70022F; BFV70042F; BFV70072F; BFV70074F; BFV70152F; BFV70154F; BFV70222F; BFV70224F; BFV70372F; BFV70374F; BFV70022FBP; BFV70042FBP; BFV70072FBP; BFV70074FP; BFV70152FBP; BFV70154FP; BFV70222FBP; BFV70224FP; BFV70374FP
Panasonic VF-8X BFV80552X; BFV80554X; BFV80554XP; BFV80752X; BFV80754X; BFV80754XP; BFV81102X; BFV81104X; BFV81104XP; BFV81502X; BFV81504X; BFV81504XP; BFV81902X; BFV81904X; BFV81904XP; BFV82202X; BFV82204X; BFV82204XP; BFV83002X; BFV83004X; BFV83004XP; BFV83702X; BFV83704X; BFV83704XP
Panasonic VF-8Z BFV80554Z; BFV80754Z; BFV81104Z; BFV81504Z; BFV81904Z; BFV82204Z; BFV83004Z; BFV83704Z
Panasonic VF-200 AVF200-0022; AVF200-0022P; AVF200-0042; AVF200-0042P; AVF200-0072; AVF200-0072P; AVF200-0152; AVF200-0152P; AVF200-0222; AVF200-0222P; AVF200-0074; AVF200-0074P; AVF200-0154; AVF200-0154P; AVF200-0224; AVF200-0224P; AVF200-0374; AVF200-0374P; AVF200-0554; AVF200-0554P; AVF200-0754; AVF200-0754P; AVF200-1104; AVF200-1104P; AVF200-1504; AVF200-1504P
Panasonic DV-700T DV700T400A1; DV700T400B1; DV700T400C1; DV700T400D1; DV700T750A1; DV700T750B1; DV700T750C1; DV700T750D1; DV700T1500A1; DV700T1500B1; DV700T1500C1; DV700T1500D1; DV700T2200A1; DV700T2200B1; DV700T2200C1; DV700T2200D1

В данной таблице присутствуют далеко не все частотные преобразователи Panasonic ремонт которых предлагает наш сервисный центр.

Ошибки частотного преобразователя Panasonic Electric

Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric

В процессе работы выходит из строя даже самое надежное промышленное оборудование. Частотники в наше время, нашли широкое применение абсолютно во всех сферах промышленности, управляя как мини моторами в оргтехнике, так и гигантскими двигателями в горнодобывающей промышленности.

Для простоты общения со столь сложной электроникой все частотные преобразователи оснащены небольшими дисплеями с помощью которых выводятся информационные сообщения с кодами ошибок, расшифровав которые можно сразу же узнать причину ее возникновения. Если учесть распространенность данной промышленной электроники, то появляется острая нужда в расшифровке кодов ошибок частотных преобразователей. В этой статье мы рассмотрим одного из самых известных производителей промышленной электроники имеющему уважение во всем мире, Panasonic и серию приводов VF-0.

Существует несколько видов ошибок, некоторые из них можно устранить автоматически, а некоторые возможно исправить только, обратившись в специализированный сервисный центр. В руководстве пользователя прописаны все коды ошибок частотного преобразователя Panasonic Electric и их расшифровка.

Коды ошибок частотного преобразователя Panasonic VF-0

Код ошибки Описание Причина
SC1
  • Instantaneous overcurrent during acceleration or abnormalheating of heat sink fins
  • Check for an output short-circuit or ground fault
  • Check the ambient temperature and fan operation
  • Increase the acceleration time
SC2
  • Instantaneous overcurrent during constant speed or abnormal heating of heat sink fins
  • Check for output short-circuit and ground fault
  • Check ambient temperature and fan operation
  • Eliminate excessive changes in load
SC3
  • Instantaneous overcurrent during deceleration or abnormal heating of heat sink fins
  • Check for output short-circuit and ground fault
  • Check ambient temperature and fan operation
  • Increase the deceleration time
OC1
  • Overcurrent during acceleration
  • Check for an open output phase
  • Increase the acceleration time
  • Adjust the torque boost level
OC2
  • Overcurrent during constant speed
  • Check for an open output phase
  • Eliminate excessive changes in load
OC3
  • Overcurrent during deceleration
  • Check for an open output phase
  • Increase the deceleration time
OU1
  • Excessive internal DC voltage during acceleration
  • Increase the acceleration time
OU2
  • Excessive internal DC voltage during constant speed
  • Eliminate excessive changes in load
OU3
  • Excessive internal DC voltage during deceleration
  • Increase the deceleration time
LU
  • Power supply voltage drops to less than 85% of rating
  • Measure the power supply voltage
  • Consider using the instantaneous power failure restart function
OL
  • An output current exceeding 125% of the electronic thermal setting current or 140% or more of the inverter rated current occurs for more than 1 minute
  • Check the electronic thermal setting current
  • Check and adjust the torque boost level
  • Reduce the load
AU
  • An auxiliary stop signal was input from control circuit terminal
  • Check the sequence circuit to confirm that the auxiliary stop signal is correct.
OP
  • The power was turned ON while the run signal was
  • The run signal was turned ON while setting data in the stopped mode, or the mode was returned to the operation mode with the MODE button
  • Check the power loss start mode (parameter P48)
  • Check the run signal when the data is being set
CPU
  • Excessive noise was applied on the inverter
  • Reduce the noise around the inverter

Полное описание ошибок, предупреждений и блокировок с рекомендациями по их устранению вы найдете в документации ниже.

Документация

Руководство по эксплуатации преобразователя частоты Panasonic VF-0

Скачать PDF

Руководство по эксплуатации преобразователей частоты Panasonic VF-7E, VF-7F, VF-8X, VF-8Z

Скачать PDF

Руководство по эксплуатации преобразователя частоты Panasonic VF-200

Скачать PDF

Руководство по эксплуатации преобразователя частоты Panasonic DV-700T

Скачать PDF

Схемы подключения частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric

Схема электрических соединений Panasonic VF-7E, VF-8X, VF-8Z Схема электрических соединений Panasonic VF-7F

Схема электрических соединений Panasonic VF-7E, VF-8X, VF-8Z

Схема электрических соединений Panasonic VF-7F

Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric

Для максимально долгой и безаворийной работы частотных преобразователей важно неукоснительно соблюдать все, что прописано в документации.

Обязательно должны соблюдаться все рекомендации, изложенные в инструкции по монтажу и эксплуатации, в особенности требования по технике безопасности!

Преобразователь частоты разработан таким образом, что он пытается избежать аварийных отключений путем ограничения момента, перенапряжения и т.п.

Появление сбоев при вводе в эксплуатацию или вскоре после него обычно свидетельствует о неверной настройке или неправильном подключении.

Возникновение неисправностей или проблем после длительного режима бесперебойной работы обычно происходит по причине изменений в системе или ее окружении (например, в результате износа).

Дополнительную информацию по частотным преобразователям Panasonic можно посмотреть и скачать на офсайте.

Настройка частотного преобразователя Panasonic Electric, программирование

Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric

Настройка частотных преобразователей Panasonic (программирование) происходит в рамках установленных производителем правил, существует общий алгоритм по программированию (настройке частотных преобразователей), относящийся ко всем производителям данного промышленного оборудования. Ниже представлена пошаговая инструкция по настройке частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric.

  • Выбор режима управления приводом Panasonic (управление по показанию датчиков, дистанционное управление, дистанционное управление).
  • В случае использования отдельного (выносного) монитора, настраивается вывод на него технической информации.
  • Далее определяем конфигурацию подключения серводвигателя. На данной стадии задаются такие параметры как- возможность применения обратной связи либо без ее применения, а в память блока заносятся данные по: величине крутящего момента, мощности потребителей, номинальное значения частоты, напряжение, ток и скорости вращения ротора.Ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric
  • Программируется минимально допустимая величина напряжения и частоты, а также время ускорения ротора от ноля до номинального значения.
  • И в завершении, в программу управления частотным преобразователем Panasonic вносятся функциональные данные со значениями отдельных клемм и особенностями сигналов. Отмечаются действия оборудования, выполняющиеся автоматически при отсутствии информации поступающей в оперативном режиме с датчика.

В некоторых частотниках существует пункт наличия/отсутствия фильтра в цепи питания двигателя. Этот пункт отвечает за подключение различных видов нагрузок, в том случае, когда возможно выбрать нормальное или инверсное изменение частоты при повышении уровня сигнала обратной связи.

Все настройки частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric приведены в технической документации к частотному преобразователю который можно скачать на свой компьютер, распечатать или просто открыть как на нашем так и на официальном сайте Panasonic Electric.

Оставить заявку на ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic Electric

У вас вышел из строя частотник? Вам необходим срочный ремонт частотных преобразователей Panasonic в Мургапе? Оставьте заявку на ремонт нажав на одноименную кнопку в верхней правой части экрана либо свяжитесь с нашими менеджерами. Связаться с ними можно несколькими способами:

  • Заказав обратный звонок (кнопка в правом нижнем углу сайта)
  • Посредством чата (кнопка расположена с левой стороны сайта)
  • Позвонив по номеру телефона: +7(8482) 79-78-54; +7(917) 121-53-01
  • Написав на электронную почту: 89171215301@mail.ru

Далеко не полный список производителей промышленной электроники и оборудования, ремонтируемой в нашей компании.

  • В начало статьи

9. Troubleshooting

Indication

Details and causes of abnormality

• Internal DC overvoltage at constant

OU2

speed

• Internal DC overvoltage during

OU1

deceleration

• Power supply voltage below 85% of its

LU

rating

• The output current exceeds 125% of

electronic thermal setting current or

OL

140% of rated current of inverter for more

than 1 minute.

OH

• Heat sink overheating

• External fault stop input signal is input

AU

from control circuit terminals.

• The power is turned ON with run signal

ON.

OP

• Timeout detected

• The communication cable comes off.

• The operation panel comes off.

FAN

• Cooling fan abnormality

• Speed search failed

• Incorrect motor rotation direction

• The rating of the motor is too small

SEr

compared with that of inverter.

• Motor rotates slowly during normal

operation.

• Too much interference is applied to the

CPU

inverter

• Communication between the inverter

Er1 *

2

unit and the operation panel failed

• VF200 unit firmware version>Operation

Er2

panel firmware version

2

*

The details of abnormality corresponding to «Er1» are not displayed in monitor

functions n020 to n023.

116

Remedies

Remove sharp variations at load side

(parameters P002, P062, P064 and

P066).

• Extend deceleration time.

• Measure power supply voltage and

check input for open phase.

• Check ride-through restart function.

• Check electronic thermal setting

current.

• Check and adjust torque boost level

(parameter P007).

• Reduce load.

• Check ambient temperature.

• Check if the external signal is proper

and if timing circuit is correct.

• Check start mode (parameter P057).

• Check communication setting and

wiring.

• Reduce the interference around the

inverter.

• Check the connection between

operation panel and the inverter.

• Check if the cooling fan is locked.

• Reduce the noise around the

inverter.

• Check the rotation direction of motor.

• Reduce the interference around the

inverter.

• Check if the operation panel is

connected properly to the unit.

• Check the firmware version.

VF200
WME-VF200-A
2013.01
panasonic.net/id/pidsx/global





 





 
Foreword 
 
Thank you for purchasing Panasonic products.
- For optimum performance and safety, please read this manual carefully before 
using this product.
- Please save this manual for future use.
 
Applicability of the Product 
 
• This general-purpose inverter manufactured by us is not designed or 
manufactured to be used in machine or system in situations that can affect or 
endanger human life.   
Before using this product in special applications such as machinery or 
systems in movable object, medical, aerospace, nuclear energy control, 
submarine relay equipments or systems, please contact us. 
• Although this product was manufactured under strict quality control system, it 
is strongly recommended to install safety devices to prevent serious accidents 
when used i
n facilities where a breakdown of this product is likely to cause a 
serious injury or major losses. 
• Do not use this product for loads other than a 3-phase induction motor. 
 
 
 





i
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Table of contents 
Safety Precautions .........................................................................1
Points for Handling ........................................................................ 9
Special Precautions ...........................................................................10
1.  Parts Identification ...................................................................13
1.1  Part Names and Functions ........................................................14
1.2  Details on Part Number...............................................................16
2.  Installation ............................................................................... 17
2.1  Safety Precautions .................................................................... 18
2.2  Installation Precautions .............................................................. 19
2.3  Outline Dimensions .................................................................... 21
2.4  Removal and Installation of Operation Panel ............................ 23
3.  Wiring .......................................................................................25
3.1  Safety Precautions .................................................................... 26
3.2  Removal and Installation of Terminal Cover ............................ 27
3.3  Wiring (Main Circuit) ................................................................. 29
3.4  Wiring (Control Circuit) ............................................................. 33
4.  Operation Method(Basic Operation) ....................................... 43
4.1  Safety Precautions .................................................................... 44
4.2  Description of Operation Panel/Simple Panel ........................... 45
4.3  Operation Modes ....................................................................... 47
4.4  Type of Operation Method ......................................................... 50





ii
 
 
 
 
 
Table of contents 
4.5  Setting Frequency with Operation Panel ................................ 51
4.6  Setting Forward/Reverse Run with Operation Panel
............... 52
4.7  Operating with Operation Panel ............................................... 54
5.  Control Status Monitor..............................................................69
5.1  List of Control Status Monitor Items ...........................................70
5.2  Introduction of Monitor No ..........................................................72
6.  Function Parameters ............................................................... 81
6.1  Setting and Changing Function Parameters .............................. 82
6.2  Function Parameter List ............................................................. 86
7.  Custom Mode ...........................................................................95
7.1  Allocating Parameter No............................................................. 96
7.2  Setting and Changing Parameters .............................................98
8.  Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory ........ 101
8.1  Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory ........... 102
8.2  Setting Built-in Memory Parameters ....................................... 103
8.3  Parameter Upload Function (CPY1) ........................................ 105
9.  Troubleshooting......................................................................113
9.1  Safety Precautions ............... ........................................ .......... 114
9.2  Abnormality Diagnostic Function and Resetting Method ......... 114
9.3  Handling Abnormalities .................... ....................................... 118
8.4  Parameter Download Function (CPY2) ................................... 107
8.5  Parameter Verification Function .............................................. 109
8.6  To Display or Conceal Built-in Memory Setting Mode ............. 111





iii
 
 
 
 
Table of contents 
10.  Maintenance and Inspection ................................................121
10.1  Safety Precautions .................................................................122
10.2  Precautions on Inspection ......................................................122
10.4  Component Replacement ...................................................... 124
10.3  Inspection Items .................................................................... 122
10.5  Maintenance and Inspection Table ........................................ 125
11.  Specifications .......................................................................129
11.1  Rated Specifications .............................................................. 130
11.2  Standard Specifications ..........................................................132
11.3  Common Specifications ..........................................................133
Appendix .....................................................................................139
Function Parameter List ..................................................................140
Precautions on European Standard Directives ..........................277
Conditions of CE Marking ..........................................................278
Warranty.....................................................................................279
“Administrative Measures for Control of Pollution 
Caused by Electronic Information Products” in 
China Names and Content Marks of Toxic or 
Hazardous Substances and Elements
.......................................276





 
 





 
 
1
 
Safety Precautions 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 





Safety Precautions 
 
 
2 
 
Safety Precautions
 
Read this manual and related documents before attempting to install, 
operate, service or inspect the inverter. 
Make sure that you have a full understanding of the device, the safety 
information and all precautions before starting use. 
Precautions described in this manual are divided into two grades: 
“Danger” and “Caution”. 
 
: Indicates dangerous situations that could lead to 
injury or death in case of mishandling. 
 
: Indicates dangerous situations that could lead to 
moderate or minor injury or property damage in 
case of mishandling. 
In addition, failure to follow the precautions in   
 
   
may also lead to serious situations depending on conditions.   
Since the precautions of the above two grades are of critical importance, 
please make sure to obverse them strictly. 
 
 
 
 





Safety Precautions 
 
3 
1. Installation 
 
Caution
 
• Install the unit on non-flammable material, such as metal, etc. Failure to 
do so may lead to fire. 
• Do not place the unit near flammable materials. Failure to do so may lead 
to fire. 
• Do not hold the unit by terminal cover while transporting it. Failure to do 
so may cause the unit to drop and result in injury. 
• Do not let foreign matter such as metal sheet enter into the unit. Failure 
to do so may lead to fire. 
• Install the unit on a place strong enough to support the weight of 
it according to the instruction manual. Failure to do so may lead to 
dropping of the unit and thus result in injury.   
• Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or with part(s) 
missing. Failure to do so may result in injury.   
 
2. Wiring 
 
Danger
 
• Always make sure that power is OFF before starting wiring. Failure to do 
so may result in an electric shock or fire. 
• Always connect ground wire. Failure to do so may result in an electric 
shock or fire. 
• Wiring work should always be carried out by qualified electrician. Failure 
to do so may result in an electric shock or fire. 
• Always install the unit before wiring. Failure to do so may result in an 
electric shock or injury. 
 





Safety Precautions 
 
 
4 
 
Caution
 
• Do not connect an AC power supply to output terminals (U, V, W). Failure 
to do so may result in injury or fire. 
• Make sure that the voltage rating of the product matches with that of  
AC power supply. Or it may result in injury and fire. 
• Tighten terminal screws to specified torque. Failure to do so may lead to 
fire. 
 
3. Operation
 
 
Danger
 
• Always close terminal cover before turning ON inlet power . Do not open 
the terminal cover while the power is ON. Failure to do so may result 
in an electric shock or fire.   
• Do not operate the switches or dials with wet hands. Failure to do so may 
result in an electric shock.   
• Do not touch inverter terminals even when the inverter is stopped while 
power ON. Failure to do so may result in an electric shock.   
• The STOP button is not designed for emergency stop purposes. Set a 
separate button for emergency stop. Failure to do so may result in injury. 
• Depending on the start mode and settings of ride-through function, if   
operating signal is ON or the power is restored from a power failure, the 
inverter may start (or restart) suddenly. Keep away from the unit to avoid 
injury. 
Design the machine so that it can ensure personal safety even if the 
inverter starts suddenly. 
• Depending on the setting of start mode function, when reset fault trip   
with the operating signal present, the inverter may restart suddenly. 

〔

 

〕





Safety Precautions 
 
5 
(Always take measures to ensure personal safety.) Failure to do so may 
result in injury.   
• When retry function is in use, the unit may automatically start (restart) 
suddenly, so do not approach the unit. (Always take measures to ensure 
personal safety.) Failure to do so may result in injury. 
• While auto-tuning function is in use, the inverter will automatically drive 
the motor in the stand-along mode when the RUN button on the panel is 
pressed. 
(Always take measures to ensure personal safety.) Failure to do so may 
result in injury. 
• If data change during operation, variations of the motor and motor load 
may change drastically and sudden stop will occur. 
(Always take measures to ensure personal safety.) Failure to do so may 
result in injury. 
 
 
Caution
 
• The heat sink and braking resistors are under high temperature, so do 
not touch them. Doing so may result in burns. 
• The inverter can be easily set to operate from low speed to high speed. 
Confirm the allowable range of motor and machine carefully during setup. 
Failure to do so may result in injury. 
• Set separate holding brakes if required. Failure to do so may result in 
injury. 
 
 
 
 
 





Safety Precautions 
 
 
6 
4. Maintenance, Inspection and Part Replacement 
 
Danger
 
• Wait at least five minutes after turning OFF inlet power before starting 
maintenance and inspection. Failure to do so may result in an electric 
shock. 
• Maintenance, inspection and part replacement work must be done only 
by qualified persons. 
[Remove all metal personal belongings (watches, bracelets, etc.) before 
starting work.] (Use tools treated with insulation.) Failure to do so may 
result in an electric shock or injury. 
 
 
Caution
 
• Employ an electrical engineering company to periodically tighten the 
terminal screws. Loosen screws may lead to overheating or fire. 
 
5. Others 
 
Danger
 
• Never modify the unit. Failure to do so may result in injury. 
 
6. General Precautions 
All diagrams in this instruction manual show the state with the cover or safety 
partitions removed to explain the details. Be sure to replace the covers and 
partitions in position, and then operate the unit according to the instruction 
manual. 





Safety Precautions 
 
7 
7. Warning Label on Inverter 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
VF200





Safety Precautions 
 
 
8 
 
 





9
 
Points for Handling
Special Precautions............................................................ 10





Points for Handling 
10 
Special Precautions 
 
Use the inverter only within allowable ambient temperature range   
   (-10~
50°C). 
Since service life of the inverter is greatly affected by ambient temperature, use 
it within allowable temperature range. Also, observe the installation directions 
and conditions. (Refer to P.21) 
The inverter will be damaged if the power voltage is applied to its   
   output side.  
Applying power voltage to the output terminal U, V or W will damage the 
inverter. Check carefully for faulty wiring and operation sequence (commercial 
switching circuit, etc.). Never apply a voltage exceeding the allowable range. 
Never touch inside of the inverter during operation. 
Failure to do so could be extremely dangerous, since the inverter contains 
high-voltage circuit. Before making an internal check, be sure to wait at least 5 
minutes after turning OFF the inverter. Do not touch heat sink or braking 
resistor during operation as these parts are under high temperature. 
Radio interference  
The main circuit of the inverter contains a high-frequency harmonic component 
and may interfere with communicating equipments (such as AM radio) nearby. 
The severity of interference depends on the radio field strength and is hard to 
be eliminated completely. While it may be reduced by relocating radio antenna, 
using noise filter, housing the inverter in a metal box, or routing cables in 
conduit. (Please inquire separately.) 
Do not conduct insulation test between wires of the inverter.  
To measure insulation resistance between power cord and motor wires, please 
remove the cables connected to the inverter and conduct test with them. Do not 
conduct insulation test on the control circuits. However, insulation test can be 
performed between charging unit and the ground. 





Points for Handling 
11 
Do not use a magnetic contactor which is connected to power side or 
   load side of the inverter to start or stop the motor (inverter). 
Frequent ON/OFF switching on the power supply side can cause inverter 
malfunction. Also, do not conduct ON/OFF switching on load side during 
inverter operation, or it can cause fault trip of the inverter. Start or stop the 
motor by operating signals of the inverter only. 
Do not connect a power capacitor or a surge absorber to output side 
   of the inverter. 
Such device can damage the inverter, resulting in broken of capacitors and 
other parts. Remove it if connected. 
Do not use the inverter for load other than a motor or for a 1-phase 
   motor. 
If parameters are frequently written in, service life of built-in   
   non-volatile memory (EEPROM) of the inverter will be shortened.  
The maximum life of non-volatile memory (EEPROM) used in VF200 is 
100,000 times. Therefore, do not write in parameters frequently. 
Precautions for inverter's protection function 
The inverter integrates various protection functions such as stall prevention, 
current limiting and over-current shut-off. These protection functions are 
functions used to protect the inverter against the sudden abnormal conditions, 
instead of general control functions. 
Therefore, avoid using them in applications where they will be activated under 
normal conditions. 
Failure to do so may reduce the inverter's service life or damage the inverter. 
 
Always measure the output current, etc. with a meter, check the details of the 
fault trip memory, and confirm that operation conditions conform to the 
precautions and specifications are correct. 
 





Points for Handling 
 
 





13
 
1
Parts Identification
1.1 Part Names and Functions..............................14
1.2 Details on Part Number...................................16





1. Parts Identification 
14 
1.1 Part Names and Functions 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Inside of terminal cover
Note) This explanatory drawing
          shows the state with terminal
          cover removed. During
          normal use, do not remove
          terminal cover.
Inside of terminal cover





1. Parts Identification 
15
 Operation panel unit 
 Warning label 
 Terminal cover 1 (terminal cover for control circuit) 
 Mounting holes 
 Casing 
 Rating nameplate*1 
 Inlet hole for control wire 
 Inlet hole for main circuit wire 
 Heat sink 
 Terminal cover 2 (terminal cover for main circuit) 
 Cooling fan*2 
 Terminal block for control circuit (relay output) 
 Terminal block for control circuit (signal input/output) 
 SINK/SOURCE changeover switch 
 Terminal block for main circuit 
 Mounting holes 
 Ground terminal 
 
 
*1  Check that the rating nameplate confirms to your order. 
*2  Not provided on the models of 0.75 kW or lower capacity. 





1. Parts Identification 
16 
1.2 Details on Part Number 
 
 
Part Number 
Power 
supply 
Applicable motor 
capacity (kW) 
Operation panel  Simple panel 
0.2  AVF200-0022  AVF200-0022P 
0.4  AVF200-0042  AVF200-0042P 
0.75  AVF200-0072  AVF200-0072P 
1.5  AVF200-0152  AVF200-0152P 
1-phase 
200 V 
2.2  AVF200-0222  AVF200-0222P 
0.75  AVF200-0074  AVF200-0074P 
1.5  AVF200-0154  AVF200-0154P
2.2  AVF200-0224  AVF200-0224P 
3.7  AVF200-0374  AVF200-0374P
5.5  AVF200-0554  AVF200-0554P 
7.5  AVF200-0754  AVF200-0754P 
11  AVF200-1104  AVF200-1104P 
3-phase 
400 V 
15  AVF200-1504  AVF200-1504P 
 
VF200





17
 
2
Installation
2.1 Safety Precautions ..........................................18
2.2 Installation Precautions ...................................19
2.3 Outline Dimensions .........................................21
2.4 
Removal and Installation of Operation Panel
....23
 





2. Installation 

2.1 Safety Precautions 
 
 
Install the unit on non-flammable material, such as 
metal,etc.  
Failure to do so may lead to fire. 
Do not place the unit near flammable materials. 
Failure to do so may lead to fire. 
Do not hold the unit by terminal cover while transporting 
it.  
Failure to do so may cause the unit to drop and result in 
injury. 
Do not let foreign matter such as metal sheet enter into 
the unit. 
Failure to do so may lead to fire. 
Install the unit on a place strong enough to support the 
weight of it according to the instruction manual. 
Failure to do so may lead to dropping of the unit and 
thus result in injury. 
Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or 
with part(s) missing.   
Failure to do so may result in injury.   





2. Installation 

2.2 Installation Precautions 
■  Do not install the inverter in the following locations. 
·Locations subject to direct sunlight 
·Locations subject to water vapor or high humidity 
·Locations with large amount of oil mist, dust or fiber dust 
·Locations where rain water, water drops or oil drops may come in contact 
·Locations where corrosive gases, explosive gases or flammable gases are 
present 
·Installation onto flammable materials such as wood, or near flammable 
materials 
·Locations subject to vibration 
 
■  Make sure that ambient temperature stays within the specifications. 
If the inverter is installed near a heat generating device or is housed in a panel, 
surrounding temperature will increase. This may reduce the life of the inverter. 
When housing the inverter in a panel, give sufficient consideration to cooling 
method and panel size. 
○  Allowable ambient temperature: -10 to +50 °C 
(Ambient temperature should be measured at a point 5 cm from the inverter.) 
○  In case multiple inverters are installed 
If multiple inverters are installed sideways, ambient temperature should be 
within -10 to + 40
 
°C. 
 
■  Install the inverter vertically. 
Installing the inverter in any other way will decrease heat dissipation effect and 
result in malfunction. 





2. Installation 
20 
 
 
■ Space for installation  
When a single inverter is installed 
To  ensure sufficient  space for  ventilation (cooling)  and  wiring  of the inverter, 
always provide a clearance as shown in the following figure. 
 
When multiple inverters are installed sideways 
If multiple inverters are installed sideways inside control panel, always provide 
a clearance as shown in the following figure. 
Vertical Horizontal Sideways





Unit : mm
4-φd(Mounting holes)
2. Installation 
21 
2.3 Outline Dimensions 
 
 
●
1-phase 200 V input type Unit: mm
Inverter 
capacity 
W1  W  H1  H  D  φ d
0.2, 0.4 kW  100  112 130 143 120 5 
0.75, 1.5 kW  100  112 130 143 150 5 
2.2 kW  130  143 130 143 160 5 
Note) Cooling fan is not mounted on 0.2 kW~0.75 
kW model.
 
●
3-phase 400 V input type Unit: mm 
Inverter 
capacity 
W1  W  H1  H  D  φ d
0.75, 1.5 kW  100  112 130 143 150 5 
2.2, 3.7 kW  130  143 130 143 150 5 
5.5, 7.5 kW  150  163 190 203 179 5 
11, 15 kW  204  223 265 283 179 7 
Note)  The  cooling  fan  is  not  mounted  on  0.75  kW 
model. 





2. Installation 
22 
 
VF200





2. Installation 
23 
2.4 Removal and Installation of Operation Panel 
 
 
Cut off the power supplied to operation panel before 
removing it. 
Do not remove the operation panel frequently. 
Otherwise, malfunction may occur. 
Do not connect the inverter or operation panel to PC or other devices via a LAN 
cable. 
Or other devices may be damaged. 
〔Removal〕  ①
While holding the center top and bottom part of the 
operation panel, pull it up vertically to remove it.
 
〔Installation〕 
②  While holding the center top and bottom part of the 
operation panel, align mounting position (align 
transverse slot on operation panel with flange on the 
casing) and press down vertically to install it.
 
 
Note) After installation, confirm that the operation panel is 
fitted in position. 
 
VF200





2. Installation 
2
■  Connect the operation panel via a LAN cable 
A commercially available LAN cable can be used to connect the main unit of 
the inverter and the operation panel. 
Use LAN cable only for the purpose of connecting the main unit of the inverter 
and operation panel. Otherwise, the inverter could be damaged. 
Specification for LAN cable: 8-Pin straight cable of CAT5 or higher (maximum 
length is 5 m) 
1. Cut off the power and then remove the panel following above instructions. 
2. Insert one end of LAN cable to the main unit of the inverter and the other end 
to connector (RJ45) on the panel until a “click” sound is heard. 
■ Inverter side ■ Operation panel side 
 
■ Installed on the plate (panel) 
 
■ Mounting Procedure 
1. Cut the mounting plate to above dimensions. 
  The suitable thickness of the plate is 1.0 mm ~ 3.5 mm. 
2. Mount the operation panel onto the front side of plate (panel), and attach the 
mounting screws supplied onto the rear side.(Tightening torque: 0.6 N・m) 
3. Mount LAN cable after the operation panel is installed. 





25
 
3
Wiring
3.1 Safety Precautions ........................................................26
3.2 Removal and Installation of Terminal Cover..................27
3.3 Wiring (Main Circuit)......................................................29
3.4 Wiring (Control Circuit)..................................................33





3. Wiring 
2
3.1 Safety Precautions 
 
 
Make sure that power is turned OFF before starting 
wiring. 
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or fire. 
Always connect ground wire.   
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or fire. 
Wiring work should always be carried out by qualified 
electrician.  
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or fire. 
Always install the unit before wiring.   
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or injury.
 
Do not connect an AC power source to output terminals 
(U, V, W).   
Failure to do so may result in injury or fire. 
Make sure that the voltage rating of the product 
matches with that of AC power source. 
Failure to do so may result in injury or fire. 
Tighten the terminal screws to the specified tightening 
torque. 
Failure to do so may lead to fire. 
 





3. Wiring 
27
3.2 Removal and Installation of Terminal Cover 
 
■  Removal and Installation of Terminal Cover 1 (Terminal Cover for Control 
Circuit ) 
〔Removal〕  ①
  While holding the center bottom edge of the 
terminal cover 1 and pull it up lightly.
 
〔Installation〕 
②  Insert the mounting jaw of terminal cover 1 
into the slot on the casing, then lightly press 
down the center bottom edge of the terminal 
cover 1.
 
 
■  Removal and Installation of Terminal Cover 2 (Terminal Cover for Main 
Circuit ) 
〔Removal〕 
① While holding the center part of the terminal 
cover 2, pull it up lightly until the mounting jaw 
release
s.
 
〔Installation〕 
②  Insert the mounting jaw of terminal cover 2 
into the slot on the casing, then lightly press 
down the terminal cover 2. 
 
Mounting jaw (two)
Terminal cover 1





3. Wiring 
28 
 
Note) After installation, make sure that the terminal cover 1 and 2 are fitted in 
position. 
Mounting jaw (two)
Terminal cover 2





3. Wiring 
 
3.3 Wiring (Main Circuit) 
 
3.3.1 Wiring (Terminals for Main Circuit) 
 
■ 1-phase 200 V  0.2~2.2 kW 
 
■ 3-phase 400 V  0.75~15 kW 
To conform to CE mark compliance, protective devices against overcurrent, 
short-circuit and current leakage must be set up on the power supply side of 
the inverter. 
 





3. Wiring 

■  Functions of Terminals for Main Circuit   
Terminal No.  Terminal name  Explanation of terminal function 
R/L1, S/L2.   
T/L3 
Power supply for Main 
circuit 
  For 1-phase 200 V type, connect to terminal 
L1 and L2. 
U, V, W 
Inverter output  Connect to 3-phase motor. 
P/DB+, DB-  Braking resistor 
connection 
Connect to braking resistor. 
N-  Internal DC voltage 
(negative) 
Negative terminal of internal DC voltage. 
   ×2 Ground  Ground terminal. 
1-phase 200 V: ground resistance 100 Ω or 
less 
3-phase 400 V: ground resistance 10 Ω or 
less 
Ground the neutral of power source. 





3. Wiring 

3.3.2 Precautions on Wiring Main Circuit 
 
■  Precautions on Wiring 
To avoid mistakes in wiring and operation, be sure to observe the following 
guides.(Failure to do so may damage the unit.) 
·Always connect the power source to input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3), and 
connect the motor to output terminals (U,V,W). 
·Use round crimp terminals with sleeve for power source and motor 
connections. Select crimp terminals according to wire sizes and screw sizes. 
·After wiring main circuit, confirm the tightening condition of terminals. 
·Main circuit must be wired prior to control circuit. Otherwise, re-tightening 
operation is not possible after control circuit wiring is completed. 
·When connecting directly to a transformer of large capacity (500 kVA or more), 
always install an AC reactor on the input side of the inverter. 
 
Note 1:  It is recommended to use teflon insulated wire (600 V, Class 2, 
allowable operating temperature up to 75 °C) for main circuit wiring. 
Note 2:  Use wires with larger diameter if the wiring distance is long. 
Note 3:  If the overcurrent trip of the circuit breaker is magnetic type, the 
device could become overheated due to higher harmonics. Use a 
load rate of 50% or lower in this case. 
Note 4:  If a circuit breaker for motor protection is in use, remove it.   
Note 5:  Always connect protective devices against overcurrent, short-circuit 
and current leakage on the input side. 
 
■  Precautions on Using Regenerative Brakes 
·When using regenerative brakes, set the parameter P019 to "0". Since the 
factory setting is "1", the brakes will not be activated. 
·Specifications for regenerative brakes are shown as follows. Carefully 
consider the operation conditions before using them. Note that the inverter 
could be damaged if a brake outside specifications is used. 
Max. duty factor (%ED): 5%  ·Max. operating time: 5 s  ·Max. torque: 100%





3. Wiring 

■  Connected Device, Wire Size and Tightening Torque (1-phase 200 V) 
Wire size 
Inverter 
capacity 
Current rating 
of circuit 
breaker for 
wiring 
(MCCB) 
L1, L2 
U, V, W 
Ground wire 
Terminal 
screw size
Tightening 
torque 
0.2 kW  5 A 
0.4 kW  10 A 
0.75 kW  15 A 
1.5 kW  20 A 
2 mm
2
 
(AWG14) 
2.2 kW  40 A 
3.5 mm
2
 
(AWG12) 
2 mm
2
 
(AWG14) 
M4 1.2 N • m 
 
■  Connected Device, Wire Size and Tightening Torque (3-phase 400 V) 
Wire size 
Inverter 
capacity 
Current rating 
of circuit 
breaker for 
wiring 
(MCCB) 
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, 
U, V, W 
Ground wire 
Terminal 
screw size
Tightening 
torque 
0.75 kW  5 A 
1.5 kW  10 A 
2.2 kW  15 A 
3.7 kW  20 A 
2 mm
2
 
(AWG14) 
2 mm
2
 
(AWG14) 
5.5 kW  30 A 
2 mm
2
 
(AWG14) 
7.5 kW  30 A 
3.5 mm
2
 
(AWG12) 
3.5 mm
2
 
(AWG12) 
M4 1.2 N • m 
11 kW  50 A 
5.5 mm
2
 
(AWG10) 
15 kW  60 A 
8 mm
2
 
(AWG8) 
8 mm
2
 
(AWG8) 
M5 2.0 N • m 





3. Wiring 
33
3.4 Wiring (Control Circuit) 
 
3.4.1 Terminal Arrangement and Functions 
 
■ Terminal arrangement 
 
·Specification for frequency setting potentiometer (VR): 10 kΩ,1/4W or higher 
 
·Specification for relay output contact : 1c volt free contact 
230 VAC 0.3 A, 30 VDC 0.3A (resistive load) 
·Specification for open-collector output: Max. rating 50 VDC, 50 mA 
Note 1) If the unit version is Ver3.0 or later, a built-in 200 Ω resistor should be 
set between terminal No.24 and COM.   
If analog input signal of 4 to 20 mA / 0 to 20 mA is used, external resistor 
connection can be eliminated by connecting terminal No.24 to No.14 or No.16. 
For external connection, it is recommended to use a
 resistor of 200 Ω, 1/4 W. 





3. Wiring 
3
■  Explanation of terminals for control circuit   
Terminal 
No. 
Terminal function  Related parameter No. 
  Common terminal for input signals (②~⑧)  - 
  Input terminal for start /stop, forward run signal    P003 
 
Input terminal for forward / reverse, reverse run 
signal 
P003 
 
Input terminal for multi-function control signal SW1   
P036, P041 
 
Input terminal for multi-function control signal SW2   
P037, P041 
 
Input terminal for multi-function control signal SW3   
P038, P041 
 
Input terminal for multi-function control signal SW4   
P039, P041 
 
Input terminal for multi-function control signal SW5   
P040, P041 
 
Common terminal for input signals (②~⑧) 
- 
 
Output terminal for open-collector (TR1) (C1: 
Collector) 
P090 
 
Output terminal for open-collector (TR2) (C2: 
Collector) 
P091 
 
Open-collector output terminal (E: Emitter) 
P090, P091 
 
Connection terminal for frequency setting 
potentiometer (+5 V) 
P004 
 
Input terminal for analog signal of frequency setting 
P004 
 
Common terminal for analog signals (
⑬
, 
⑭
, 
⑯
, 
⑰
) 
- 
 
Input terminal for the 2
nd
 analog signal 
P106-P111, P124, P125 
 
Output terminal for multi-function analog signal (0 ~ 
10 V/PWM) 
P097, 098 
 
Common terminal for analog signals (
⑬
, 
⑭
, 
⑯
, 
⑰
) 
- 
 
+ terminal for RS485 communication transmission 
line (D+) 
P135-P142 
 
- terminal for RS485 communication transmission 
line (D-) 
P135-P142 
 
+ terminal for RS485 communication transmission 
line (D+) 
P135-P142 
 
- terminal for RS485 communication transmission 
line (D-) 
P135-P142 
 
Terminal for terminal station of RS485 
communication (E) 
P135-P142 





3. Wiring 

 
Built-in 200 Ω terminal for analog current input  P004, P125 
A 
Output terminal for relay contact    (NO: factory 
setting) 
P092 
B 
Output terminal for relay contact    (NC: factory 
setting) 
P092 
C 
Output terminal for relay contact (COM) 
P092 
Note ) Common terminals (①,  ⑨,  ⑮,  ⑱) are connected internally. 
Do not ground the common terminal. 





3. Wiring 

3.4.2 Common Precautions on Terminals for Control Circuit 
 
■  Precautions on Wiring 
·For wiring of terminals of control circuit, strip specified length of insulation 
coating before connecting. 
·Loosen the terminal screws and insert the wires from bottom of the terminal 
block, and tighten the screws to specified tightening torque. 
·Twist the strands of stripped wires, avoiding length variance. 
Also, do not solder them. 
·Any loose connection could cause wire to come off and lead to malfunction. 
Also, over-tightening could cause short-circuit due to screws and the unit 
broken, thus lead to malfunction. 
·Use shielded cables for all control signal lines and separate them from power 
lines or high-voltage circuits (20 cm or more). 
·Wiring length of control signal lines should be within 30 m. 
·Since input signals of control circuit are feeble, use dedicated terminals for 
feeble signals to avoid poor contact during contact input. 
 
■  Wire Size and Tightening Torque for Control Circuit Terminal 
Terminal 
symbol 
Screw size 
Tightening torque 
N·m 
Wire size 
Stripping 
length of wire 
A, B, C 
M3 
0.5 to 0.6 
0.25 to 0.75 mm
2
 
(AWG24 to AWG18) 
6 mm 
①~   M2  0.22 to 0.25 
0.25~0.75 mm
2
 
(AWG24 to AWG18) 
5 mm 
 
·Screwdriver: Small-size  ㊀ screwdriver 
(Thickness of the edge: 0.4 mm/ Width of the edge: 2.5 mm) 
 
·Removed length of 
insulation 
 





3. Wiring 
37 
3.4.3 Specific Precautions on Each Terminal 
 
■  Terminals for Control Circuit (Terminal No.1~9) 
·Control logic of input signal can be switched according to the connected 
external input devices. Please set the changeover switch of VF200 unit as 
required. 
·Input circuit is shown in the following figure. Take back current and leakage 
current into account. 
 
 
Wiring diagram and precautions for sink input setting 
·Set the changeover switch to “SINK” position. 
·Since the power of internal circuit is supplied from internal +12 V, never 
connect an external power source. Otherwise, it can cause
 inverter fault. 
·Please connect signals of volt free contact or open-collector to control 
terminal No.2 to 8. 
 
 





3. Wiring 

Wiring diagram and precautions for source input setting 
·Set the changeover switch to “SOURCE” position. 
·Supply +24V power to each input terminal. 
 
 





3. Wiring 
39
■  Wiring for PWM/Pulse input controlled Operating Frequency Mode (Terminal No.7, 8) 
·When parameter P087 is set to "1”, the operating frequency will be controlled 
by external PWM signal from PLC, etc.   
·When parameter P087 is set to "2”, the operating frequency will be controlled
by external pulse signal from PLC, etc.
·Terminal No.7 is the input terminal for changeover of frequency setting signal   
(SW4) (OFF: PWM/Pulse input signal, ON: controlled by the signal set in parameter P004), 
while terminal No.8 is the input terminal for PWM/Pulse input signal . 
·As for the transistor for PWM/Pulse input signal, please use one with maximum  
voltage rating over 50 V and maximum current rating over 50 mA.   
·In addition, to use PWM signal for operating frequency control, relevant 
settin
gs must be made to parameter P088 and P089. 
·Use pulse signal for operating frequency control, relevant settings must be 
made to parameter P174.
·When setting value is "1" or "2", the SW function for SW4(terminal No.7) and 
SW5(terminal No.8) will be forced to be used for controlling PWM/pulse signal only.
 
■  Wiring for Open-collector Output Terminals (Terminal No.10 to 12) 
·When using open-collector output terminals to drive inductive loads, always 
connect a freewheel diode.   
 
 
⑦
⑧
⑨
PWM Signal
⑦
⑧
⑨
Pulse input signal





3. Wiring 

■  Wiring for Analog Signal Terminals (Terminal No.13 to 16, 24) 
·When parameter P004 is set to “2”,    frequency setting will be made through 
external potentiometer. 
·When using external potentiometer for frequency setting, select a 
potentiometer of “10 kΩ, 1/4 W or higher” rating. 
·When parameter P004 is set to “5” (4 to 20 mA) or “6” (0 to 20 mA), frequency 
setting will be made through analog current signal.   
·When using analog current signal (4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA) for frequency 
setting, connect a resistor of “200 Ω, 1/4 W” rating. (Failure to do so may 
damage the inverter.) 
·If the unit version is Ver3.0 or later, a built-in 200 Ω resistor should be set 
between terminal No.24 and COM. If analog input signal of 4 to 20 mA / 0 to 20 
mA is used, external resistor connection can be eliminated by connecting 
terminal No.24 to No.14 or No.16. 
 
■  Wiring for RS485 Communication Terminals (Terminal No.19 to 23) 
The following figure shows the terminals used when connection is made 
between PC and PLC via RS485 communication lines. 
 





3. Wiring 

·As for communication cable, use a shielded twisted-pair cable and separate it 
from power lines or high-voltage circuits (20 cm or more). 
·The total wiring length of the communication cables must not exceed 500 m. 
·Connect the communication terminals “D+” to “D+” and “D-” to “D-”. 
·Jump out the terminal “D-” and “E” of the inverter used as terminal 
station.Jumping is not allowed for any other device. 





42 
 





43
 
4
Operation Method
(Basic Operation)
4.1 Safety Precautions ........................................................44
4.2 Description of Operation Panel/Simple Panel ...............45
4.3 Operation Modes...........................................................47
4.4 Type of Operation Method .............................................50
4.5 Setting Frequency with Operation Panel.......................51
4.6 Setting Forward/Reverse Run with Operation Panel ....52
4.7 Operating with Operation Panel ....................................54
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 
44
4.1 Safety Precautions 
 
 
・Always close the terminal cover before turning ON the 
inlet power. 
・Do not open the terminal cover while the power is ON. 
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or fire. 
・Do not operate the switches or dials with wet hands. 
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock. 
・Do not touch the inverter terminals when the inverter 
power is ON or even when the inverter is stopped.   
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock. 
・The STOP button is not designed for emergency stop 
purpose, so set a separate button for emergency
 stop.   
Failure to do so may result in injury.   
 
・The heat sinks and braking resistors are at high 
temperature, so do not touch them.   
Failure to do so could lead to burn. 
・The inverter can easily be switched to high speed from 
low speed, so confirm the allowable range of the motor 
and machine before making settings. 
Failure to do so could lead to injury.   
・Set separate holding brakes if required. 
Failure to do so could lead to injury.   
・Before turning on the power, check the following points again. 
1. Check if all wirings are correct or not again. 
 
Reversed wirings between power supply and load in 
 
particular could damage the inverter. 
2. Check if the voltage rating of the inverter matches 
  with power supply. 
3. 
Check if a phase-lead capacitor is connected to the motor. 
  Connection of phase-lead capacitor could result in 
  faults to the inverter and capacitor. 
4. 
Confirm the set frequency before starting a trial operation.





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 
45 
4.2 
Description of Operation Panel/Simple Panel 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Component name  Details of function 
① 
Display part 
For displaying output frequency, current, linear speed, set 
frequency, communication station No., error details, each 
mode indication and function setting data 
②  FWD indicator (green) 
For indicating forward run (ON during constant-speed 
running/Flickering during acceleration/deceleration running) 
③  REV indicator (green) 
For indicating reverse run (ON during constant-speed 
running/Flickering during acceleration/deceleration running) 
④ 
Potentiometer on the 
panel 
A potentiometer dial on operation panel for setting the 
operating frequency. 
⑤ 
Alarm (ALM) indicator 
(red) 
For indicating abnormality and alarms. (Refer to P100: Alarm 
LED Operation Select) 
Operation panel  Simple panel 
VF200
VF200





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

 
Component name  Details of function 
RUN button  A button for making inverter running 
STOP button  A button for making inverter stopping 
MODE button 
A button for switching various modes (such as “operation 
status display”, “frequency setting and monitor”, “rotation 
direction setting”, “control state monitor”, “custom”, “function 
setting” and “built-in memory setting”), and switching data 
display to mode display 
SET button 
A key for switching between mode display and data display 
and saving the data. 
In “operation status display mode”, it is used for the switching 
between frequency display and current display. 
c (UP) button 
It is used to change data and output frequency, and to set 
forward run direction when carrying out forward run with 
operation panel. 
⑥ 
b (DOWN) button 
For changing data and output frequency, and for setting 
reverse run direction during reverse run made with operation 
panel. 
⑦  POWER LED  Lighting up when the inverter power is turned ON.   





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 
47
4.3 Operation Modes 
 
■  Functions of Operation Modes 
Mode  Description  Panel display content 
①Operation 
status 
display 
mode 
For displaying output 
frequency and output current 
②Frequency 
setting 
mode 
For digital setting of 
frequency and frequency 
command monitoring 
③Rotation 
direction 
setting 
mode 
For rotation direction setting 
of panel operation and 
control status (operation 
panel/external 
control/communication) 
monitoring 
④Control 
status 
monitoring 
mode 
For monitoring of control 
status and abnormality 
 
⑤Custom 
mode 
For registering up to 10 
frequently-used parameters , 
changing and monitoring 
data 
⑥Function 
setting 
mode 
For changing and monitoring 
parameter data as well as 
using copy function of 
parameter data 
⑦Built-in 
memory 
setting 
mode 
For changing set data in 
built-in memory of operation 
panel 
(Option: Display/ Conceal) 
 
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

■  Switching of Operation Modes 
·Press MODE button to switch various modes in order. 
·In each mode, if SET button is pressed, data monitoring or changing function 
will be enabled; and if MODE button is pressed, it will return to the previous 
display status. Therefore, if SET button is pressed by mistake, just press 
MODE button to return to the previous display status. 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 
50
4.4 Type of Operation Method 
 
There are 3 methods to operate VF200 as follows. 
1. Operation panel 
Making inverter operation by using buttons and potentiometer on operation 
panel. 
2. External control 
Making inverter operation by using control circuit terminals. (Refer to P.142.) 
3. Communication (RS485) 
Making inverter operation by using commands sent from host computer or 
host PLC. 
   (Refer to P.142 and P.254.) 
For details of communication functions, please refer to “VF200 
communication function manual”, which can be downloaded fro
m our website: 
http://device.panasonic.cn/ac/c





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

4.5 Setting Frequency with Operation Panel 
 
There are 2 modes to set frequency with operation panel as follows. 
■  Potentiometer Setting Mode (Parameter P004 is set to “0”: factory setting.) 
Adjust the position of potentiometer dial on operation panel to make setting. 
MIN. position stands for operation stop (0V stop: see parameter P101), while 
MAX. position for the maximum frequency.   
 
■  Digital Setting Mode (Parameter P004 is set to “1”.) 
Press MODE button on the panel to enter frequency setting mode (display: Fr); 
press SET button and display the frequency to be set by pressing UP and DOWN 
buttons and then press SET button again to complete the setting. Also, the 
following “MOP function” can be used for frequency setting during operation. 
 
MOP function 
The frequency can be changed by pressing and holding UP or DOWN button 
during operation. However, if parameter P003 is set to “1”, this function does not 
work. 
The operation will vary according to the settings of “Parameters” P154: MOP 
Function Select” and “P155: MOP Operation Acceleration/Deceleration Time”. 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

4.6 Setting Forward/Reverse Run with 
Operation Panel 
 
There are 2 modes to set forward/reverse run with operation panel as follows. 
■  Forward/Reverse Run Button Operation Mode (Parameter P003 is set to “1”.) 
Press UP (forward run) button or DOWN (reverse run) button on the panel to 
select the rotation direction. Then press RUN button to start operation. 
* The inverter will not run just by pressing RUN button. 
* The “MOP function” cannot be used if frequency setting is made in “Digital 
Setting Mode”. 
 
 
 
■  Rotation Direction Setting Operation Mode (Parameter P003 is set to “0”.) 
In Operation Status Display Mode, press MODE button twice to enter Rotation 
Direction Setting Mode. Press SET button to display the rotation direction data, 
change the rotation direction with UP and DOWN buttons, and then press SET 
button again to apply the change. (The factory setting is “forward run”.) 
Finally, press RUN button to start operation. 
 
Run 
 command 
Display 
 Rotation 
direction 
Display 
Operation 
panel 
L 
Forward 
run 
F 
External 
control 
E 
Reverse 
run 
r 
Communication 
C    
Current 
status 
Display 
 Rotation 
direction 
Display 
During 
stop 
O 
Forward 
run 
F 
During 
forward 
run 
F 
Reverse 
run 
r 
During 
reverse 
run 
r    
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

* The relationship between operation modes and “MOP function” and “Rotation 
direction setting content” 
Operation mode  MOP function 
Rotation direction 
setting content 
Forward/Reverse Run Button 
Operation Mode 
× (unavailable) 
Only monitoring 
function is available 
Rotation Direction Setting 
Operation Mode 
○ (available) 
Both monitoring and 
direction setting 
function are available 
 
 
·When operation mode is set to Forward/Reverse Run Button Operation Mode,   
the MOP function cannot be used even if frequency setting is made in Digital 
Setting Mode. 
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

4.7 Operating with Operation Panel 
 
When the inverter is operated with operation panel, as shown in “4.5 Setting 
Frequency with Operation Panel” and “4.6 Setting Forward/Reverse Run with 
Operation Panel”, there are 4 combined modes by using parameters “P003: Run 
Command Select” and “P004: Frequency Setting Signal”. 
This section will describe the four operation modes through specific examples.   
  
Parameter P004: “Frequency Setting Signal” 
  
Setting value “0”  Setting value “1” 
Setting value “0”  Operation mode 1  Operation mode 3 
Parameter P003: 
“Run Command 
Select” 
Setting value “1”  Operation mode 2  Operation mode 4 
 
■  Operation status when the panel is removed during operation 
Sometimes OP trip will not occur if the operation panel is removed during 
operation. 
Item 
Conditions of OP 
trip occurrence 
Conditions of OP trip 
non-occurrence 
Setting values of 
“P003: Run 
Command Select” 
and “P004: Frequency 
Setting Signal”
 
P003 = 0 or 1 
or 
P004 = 0
 
P003 is set to a   
value greater than “2” 
and 
P004 is set to a value 
greater than “1”.
 
Inverter operation 
status when the panel 
is removed during 
operation
 
Operation stops   
due to OP trip 
occurrence.
 
Operation continues. 
 
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

4.7.1 Operating with Operation Panel - 1 (Factory Setting) 
 
·Forward/reverse run function: Rotation Direction Setting Operation 
Mode”(Parameter P003 = 0) 
·Frequency setting: Potentiometer Setting Mode (Parameter P004 = 0) 
 
■
 Operating Example 
①
: Forward run operation at operating frequency of 25 Hz 
1. Turn on the power. 
The display part will be ON immediately after power-on. 
(Operation Status Display Mode) 
 
2. Start operation. 
Press 
 
button. 
The inverter enters operation status, but it can be only in 0V 
stop status due to the frequency setting dial is in the MIN. 
position. 
 
3. Adjust frequency. 
Turn the frequency setting dial 
  clockwise slowly till the 
value “25.0” appears.The motor starts to run. The value “25.0” 
indicates that the motor is running at 25 Hz. 
 
4. Input stop command. 
Press 
 
button. The motor starts to decelerate till to stop. 
 
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

■ Operating Example ②: Reverse run operation at operating frequency of 25 
Hz 
1. Turn on the power. 
The display part will be ON immediately after power-on. 
(Operation Status Display Mode) 
 
2. Change rotation direction.   
Press 
 
button twice successively. 
Press 
 
button. (The display part is flickering.) 
Press 
 
button. (The display part is flickering.) 
Press 
 
button to set data. 
(Return to Operation Status Display Mode.) 
3. Start operation. 
Press 
 
button. The inverter enters operation status, but it 
can be only in 0V stop status due to the frequency setting dial 
is in the MIN. position. 
 
4. Adjust frequency. 
Turn the frequency setting dial 
  clockwise slowly till the 
value “25.0” appears.The motor starts to run. The value “25.0” 
indicates that the motor is running at 25 Hz. 
 
5. Input stop command. 
Press 
 
button. The motor starts to decelerate till to stop. 
 
■ Operating Example ③: Changing rotation direction during operation 
The operations are the same as “Changing rotation direction” shown in the above 
example. But in this case, as the SET button is pressed in the final procedure, the 
display will be switched to Operation Status Display Mode and the motor will 
rotate in reverse direction with deceleration. 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

4.7.2 Operating with Operation Panel - 2 
 
·Forward/reverse run function: Forward/Reverse Run Button Operation Mode 
(Parameter P003 = 1) 
·Frequency setting: Potentiometer Setting Mode (Parameter P004 = 0) 
 
■ Operating Example ①: Forward run operation at operating frequency of 25 Hz 
1. Turn on the power. 
The display part will be ON immediately after power-on. 
(Operation Status Display Mode) 
 
2. Set rotation direction. 
Press 
 
button to select forward run. 
(Press 
 
button to select reverse run.) 
 
3. Start operation. 
Press 
 
button. 
The inverter enters running status, but it can be only in 0V stop 
status due to the frequency setting dial is in the MIN. position. 
 
4. Adjust frequency. 
Turn the frequency setting dial 
 
clockwise slowly till the 
motor starts to run. The value “25.0” indicates that the motor is 
running at 25 Hz. 
 
5. Input stop command. 
Press 
 
button. The motor starts to decelerate till to stop. 
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

■ Operating Example ②: Monitoring and setting potentiometer frequency 
command before operation 
1. Turn on the power. 
The display part will be ON immediately after power-on. 
(Operation Status Display Mode) 
2. Confirm and set operating frequency. 
Press 
 
button. 
Press 
 
button to confirm frequency command. 
Turn the frequency setting dial 
  
clockwise, and set 
frequency command to 25 Hz. 
Press 
 
button to set operating frequency.   
3. Set rotation direction. 
Press 
 
button to select forward run. 
(Press 
 
button to select reverse run.) 
4. Start operation. 
Press 
 
button.The motor starts to run. The value 
“25.0” indicates that the motor is running at 25 Hz. 
5. Switch forward run to reverse run during operation. 
Press 
 
button. 
6. Start operation. 
Press 
 
button. The motor gradually decelerates 
and starts reverse run operation at 25 Hz again. 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

7. Stop operation. 
Press 
 
button. The motor starts to decelerate till to 
stop. 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

■ Operating Example ③: Cancelling rotation direction setting 
To cancel the setting, press    / 
 
button again after using them to set 
the rotation direction. 
During forward run operation at 25 Hz 
1. Set rotation direction. 
Press 
 
button to select reverse run. 
 
2. Cancel the setting. 
Press 
 
button. 
The display is switched to “operation status” from “rotation 
direction” and the setting is cancelled. 
 
 
 
·When the inverter is stopped, you may also use the same procedure as above 
to cancel the setting.   
·If RUN button is not pressed after rotation direction setting, the actual rotation 
direction will not change. 
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

4.7.3 Operating with Operation Panel - 3 
 
·Forward/reverse run function: Rotation Direction Setting Operation Mode 
(Parameter P003 = 0) 
·Frequency setting: Digital Setting Mode (Parameter P004 = 1) 
 
■
 Operating Example 
①
: Forward run operation at operating frequency of 25 Hz 
1. Turn on the power. 
The display part will be ON immediately after power-on. 
(Operation Status Display Mode) 
2. Set operating frequency. 
Press 
 
button. 
Press 
 
button.(The display part is flickering.) 
Press  /
 
button to make value “25.0 (Hz)” 
appear on the display. (The display part is flickering.) 
Press 
 
button to set the changed value and return 
to operation status mode. 
3. Start operation. 
Press 
 
button. 
Since the factory setting is forward run, the motor will 
start to rotate clockwise at 25.0 Hz. 
 
 
 
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

4. Set operating frequency (forward run operation at 
operating frequency of 50 Hz). 
Press 
 
button.(The display part is flickering.) 
Press 
 
button.(The display part is flickering.) 
Press  /
 
button to make value “50.0 (Hz)” 
appear on the display. (The display part is flickering.) 
Press 
 
button to make acceleration till to 50 Hz. 
5. Stop operation. 
Press 
 
button. The motor starts to decelerate till to 
stop. 
 
6. Change rotation direction (reverse run operation at 
operating frequency of 50 Hz). 
Press 
 
button twice successively. 
Press 
 
button.(The display part is flickering.) 
Press 
 
button.(The display part is flickering.) 
Press 
 
button.(Return to Operation Status Display 
Mode.) 
7. Start operation. 
Press 
 
button. 
Since the frequency has been set to 50 Hz, the motor 
will start to rotate counterclockwise at 50.0 Hz. 
 
 
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

8. Switch reverse run to forward run during operation. 
Press 
 
button twice successively. 
Press 
 
button.(The display part is flickering.) 
Press 
 
button.(The display part is flickering.) 
Press 
 
button. The motor gradually decelerates 
and starts forward run operation at 50 Hz again. 
9. Stop operation. 
Press 
 
button. The motor starts to decelerate till to 
stop. 
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

■ Operating Example ②: Changing frequency by using  /
 
button 
during operation (MOP function) 
Press 
/
 
button to change operating frequency during operation. The 
motor will accelerate or decelerate according to such operation. 
 
Operating frequency will rise when 
 
button is kept on pressed.   
Operating frequency will drop when 
 
button is kept on pressed.   
 
 
·Once operating frequency is determined, press MODE button to display 
frequency setting mode “Fr” and then press SET button twice to set operating 
frequency. 
If the above setting is not made, the frequency will not be saved when the power is OFF. 
The operation status will vary depending on the settings of parameters “P154: 
MOP Function Select” and “P155: MOP Operation Acceleration/Deceleration 
Time”. 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

4.7.4 Operating with Operation Panel - 4 
 
·Forward/reverse run function: Forward/Reverse Run Button Operation Mode 
(Parameter P003 = 1) 
·Frequency setting: Digital Setting Mode (Parameter P004 = 1) 
 
■  Operating Example: Forward run operation at operating frequency of 25 Hz 
1. Turn on the power. 
The display part will be ON immediately after power-on. 
(Operation Status Display Mode) 
2. Set operating frequency. 
Press 
 
button. 
Press 
 
button.(The display part is flickering.) 
Press  /
 
button to make value “25.0 (Hz)” 
appear on the display. (The display part is flickering.) 
Press 
 
button to set the data. 
3. Set rotation direction. 
Press 
 
button to select forward run. 
(Press 
 
button to select reverse run.) 
4. Start operation. 
Press 
 
button. 
The motor starts to rotate clockwise at 25 Hz. 
 
 
 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

5. Start forward run operation at operating frequency of 50 
Hz. 
Press 
 
button. 
Press 
 
button.(The display part is flickering.) 
Press  /
 
button to make value “50.0 (Hz)” 
appear on the display. (The display part is flickering.) 
Press 
 
button to set operating frequency.   
6. Stop operation. 
Press 
 
button. The motor starts to decelerate till to 
stop. 
7. Start reverse run operation at operating frequency of 50 
Hz. 
Press 
 
button to select reverse run. 
8. Start operation. 
Press 
 
button. 
Since the frequency has been set to 50 Hz, the motor 
will start to rotate counterclockwise at 50.0 Hz. 
9. Switch reverse run to forward run during operation. 
Press 
 
button to select forward run. 
10. Start operation. 
Press 
 
button. 
The motor gradually decelerates and starts forward run 
operation at 50 Hz again. 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

11. Stop operation. 
Press 
 
button. The motor starts to decelerate till to 
stop. 
 
 
·The rotation direction cannot be set in “rotation direction setting mode (dr)”. 
The mode can only monitor the operation panel/external 
control/communication controlling rotation direction and operation status. 
·The MOP function cannot be used. 





4. Operation Method (Basic Operation) 

 





69
 
5
Control Status Monitor
5.1 List of Control Status Monitor Items..............................70
5.2 Introduction of Monitor No. ............................................72
 





5. Control Status Monitor 
70
5.1 List of Control Status Monitor Items 
 
The 23 items listed below can be monitored in control status monitor mode. 
Monitor 
No. 
Monitor item  Unit  Indication 
n001  Output frequency  Hz  Output frequency 
n002 
Output current 
A 
Output current 
n003 
Output voltage 
VAC 
Output voltage 
n004 
Internal DC voltage 
VDC 
Internal DC voltage 
n005 
Set frequency  Hz  Frequency setting 
n006 
Communication station No. 
- 
Current setting of communication station No. 
n007 
Operation times of timer  Times
Continuous operation times of timer in one 
cycle 
n008  Alarm type 
- 
Indication of alarm LED 
n009 
Control circuit terminal status 
(input signal) 
- 
Input signal status of control circuit terminals
n010 
Control circuit terminal status 
(output signal) 
- 
Output signal status of control circuit 
terminals 
n011 
Operation status monitor  -  Operation status of inverter 
n012 
Operation control status 
monitor 
- 
Operation control status of inverter 
n013 
Terminal function status 
monitor 
- 
Function status of control circuit terminals in   
inverter 
n014  PID setting value (SP) 
% 
Setting value (SP) of PID control 
n015 
PID measured value (PV) 
% 
Measured value (PV) of PID control 
n016 
PID output value (MV) 
% 
Output value (MV) of PID control 
n017 
Progress of automatic tuning 
- 
Progress of automatic tuning during PID 
control 
n018 
Accumulative operation time  -  Accumulative operation time of inverter 
n019 
Accumulative operation time 
of fan 
-  Accumulative operation time of inverter fan 
n020  Abnormality display 1 (latest) 
- 
Details of the latest abnormality 
n021 
Abnormality display 2 (second
to latest) 
- 
Details of abnormality from second to latest 
n022 
Abnormality display 3 (third to 
latest) 
-  Details of abnormality from third to latest 





5. Control Status Monitor 
71
n023 
Abnormality display 4 (fourth 
to latest) 
- 
Details of abnormality from fourth to latest 
n024 
Unit version * 
- 
Firmware version of VF200 unit 
n025 
Panel version * 
- 
Firmware version of operation panel 
n026 
Detection value for pulse input signal
Hz 
Detect frequency value based on pulse input signal 
n027 
Winding length
m 
Current winding length 





5. Control Status Monitor 
72 
5.2 Introduction of Monitor No. 
 
n001  Output frequency 
For displaying output frequency of inverter. When the inverter is stopped, “0.0” 
is displayed. 
 
n002 
n003 
n004 
Output Current 
Output Voltage 
Internal DC Voltage 
For displaying output current, output voltage and internal DC voltage of inverter. 
The indications are just reference values instead of accurate values for 
precision measurement. 
(If you need accurate values, use other measuring instrument.) 
 
n005  Set Frequency 
For displaying set frequency of inverter. 
 
n006  Communication Station No. 
For displaying set communication station number. 
The communication station No. can be set with “P136: Communication Station 
No. Setting”. 
 
n007  Operation Times of Timer 
For displaying operation times of timer in one cycle during multi-speed 
operation of timer, acceleration/deceleration linking operation of timer, 
multi-speed operation of pulse input and acceleration and deceleration linking 
operation of pulse input. When a cycle starts, the operation times will be 
counted up. When each operation ends and the next run command is input, the 
counted times will be cleared. 
Operation times of timer can be set with “P068: Timer Operation Times”. 





5. Control Status Monitor 
73 
 
n008  Alarm Type 
For displaying different alarm LED contents.   
Alarm type  Indication 
Normal 
Abnormal output voltage 
alarm 
Overload alarm 
Abnormal temperature 
alarm 
Abnormal cooling fan alarm
Timer stop signal 
Note) 1. When “Alarm LED Operation Select”
 (parameter P147) is set to “1”.
 
When various alarms occur simultaneously, the display priority is as follows. (If 
a higher-priority alarm is in displaying, it will still exist exclusively even if a 
lower-priority alarm enters.) 
Abnormal 
temperature 
alarm 
> 
Overload 
alarm 
> 
Abnormal 
output 
voltage 
alarm 
> 
Abnormal 
cooling fan 
alarm 
> 
 
Timer stop 
signal 





5. Control Status Monitor 
74
n009 
n010 
Control Circuit Terminal Status (Input Signal) 
Control Circuit Terminal Status (Output Signal) 
For displaying various status of input and output signals of control circuit 
terminals. 
When input terminals (② to ⑧) and common terminal (① or ⑨) are turned 
ON, segment a1 to g1 light up; when input terminals (② to ⑧) and common 
terminal (① or ⑨) are turned OFF, segment a1 to g1 light out. 
When output terminals are closed (ON) between  ⑩ to ⑫ and ⑪ to ⑫, 
segment a1 and b1 of n010 light up; when output terminals are opened (OFF) 
between  ⑩ to ⑫ and ⑪ to ⑫, segment a1 and b1 of n010 light out. 
Segment c1 lights up when the output terminal is ON (Excitation in ON status: 
short circuit across A-C; non-excitation in ON status: short circuit across B-C); 
segment c1 lights out when the output terminal is OFF (Excitation in ON status: 
open circuit across B-C; non-excitation in ON status: open circuit across A-C). 
LED segment indication 
Monitor No.  I/O signal 
Terminal 
indication 
Signal ON  Signal OFF 
Run/stop  “a” lights up  “a1” lights up  “a1” lights out 
Forward/reverse run  “b” lights up  “b1” lights up  “b1” lights out 
SW1 
“c” lights up  “c1” lights up  “c1” lights out 
SW2 
“d” lights up  “d1” lights up  “d1” lights out 
SW3 
“e” lights up  “e1” lights up  “e1” lights out 
SW4 
“f” lights up  “f1” lights up  “f1” lights out 
n009 
SW5 
“g” lights up  “g1” lights up  “g1” lights out 
Open-collector 1  “a” lights up  “a1” lights up  “a1” lights out 
Open-collector 2  “b” lights up  “b1” lights up  “b1” lights out n010 
Relay  “c” lights up  “c1” lights up  “c1” lights out 
 
 





5. Control Status Monitor 
75 
n011  Operation Status Monitor 
For displaying operation status of inverter. Each LED segment lights up and out 
depending on details shown in the following table. 
Normally, segment i to I light up. 
LED segment indication 
Monitor 
No. 
Operation status 
Details of lighting up  Details of lighting out 
Run Stop 
Operation status 
“a” lights up  “a” lights out 
Reverse run  Stop or forward run 
Reverse run status 
“b” lights up  “b” lights out 
ON OFF 
Arrival signal 
“c” lights up  “c” lights out 
ON OFF 
Overload signal 
“d” lights up  “d” lights out 
ON OFF 
Frequency detection 
(parameter P093) 
“e” lights up  “e” lights out 
ON OFF 
Frequency detection 
(parameter P094) 
“f” lights up  “f” lights out 
ON OFF 
Current signal detect 
(upper limit) 
“g” lights up  “g” lights out 
ON OFF 
Current signal detection 
(lower limit) 
“h” lights up  “h” lights out 
PID automatic tuning status  Normal operation status 
PID automatic tuning 
function 
“a1” lights up  “a1” lights out 
Timer operation status  Normal operation status 
Timer operation 
function 
“b1” lights up  “b1” lights out 
Motor constant automatic 
tuning status 
Normal operation status 
Motor constant 
automatic tuning 
function 
“c1” lights up  “c1” lights out 
Abnormal Normal 
Abnormality status 
“d1” lights up  “d1” lights out 
Speed search status  Normal operation status 
Speed search function 
“e1” lights up  “e1” lights out 
Winding mode control status  Normal operation status 
n011 
Winding mode control 
“f1” lights up  “f1” lights out 
 
 





5. Control Status Monitor 
76 
n012  Operation Control Status Monitor 
For displaying operation control status of inverter. Each LED segment lights up 
and out depending on details shown in the following table. Normally, segment i 
to I light up. 
When command status is "Timer in Operation" and parameter P45 
(Multi-speed Function Setting) is set to “3” or “4”, relevant segment lights up if 
operation command is input. 
When command status is “Pulse Input in Operation” and parameter P45 
(Multi-speed Function Setting) is set to “5” or “6”, relevant segment lights up if 
operation command is input. 
 
LED segment indication 
Monitor 
No. 
Command 
status 
1: with command  0: without command 
Run command 
status 
“a” lights up  “a” lights out 
Reverse run 
command status 
“b” lights up  “b” lights out 
SW1 command 
status 
“c” lights up  “c” lights out 
SW2 command 
status 
“d” lights up  “d” lights out 
SW3 command 
status 
“e” lights up  “e” lights out 
SW4 command 
status 
“f” lights up  “f” lights out 
SW5 command 
status 
“g” lights up  “g” lights out 
Timer in 
operation 
“h” lights up  “h” lights out 
n012 
Pulse input in 
operation 
“a1” lights up  “a1” lights out 
 
 
 
 





5. Control Status Monitor 
77
n013  Terminal Function Status Monitor 
For displaying function status of control circuit terminals. Each LED segment 
lights up and out depending on details shown in the following table. Normally, 
segment i to l light up. 
 
LED segment indication 
Monitor 
No. 
Command status 
1: with command  0: without command 
Multi-speed function  “a” lights up  “a” lights out 
Parameter setting 
disable function 
“b” lights up  “b” lights out 
Reset input function  “c” lights up  “c” lights out 
Reset lock function  “d” lights up  “d” lights out 
JOG function  “e” lights up  “e” lights out 
Abnormal stop 
function from 
external 
“f” lights up  “f” lights out 
Coast-to-stop function 
“g” lights up  “g” lights out 
Frequency signal 
switching function 
“h” lights up  “h” lights out 
The 2
nd
 
characteristics select 
function 
“a1” lights up  “a1” lights out 
PID control switching 
function 
“b1” lights up  “b1” lights out 
3-wire stop 
command function 
“c1” lights up  “c1” lights out 
Frequency c(UP) 
/b(DOWN) setting 
function 
“d1” lights up  “d1” lights out 
PWM frequency 
signal select function 
“e1” lights up  “e1” lights out 
Pulse counter input 
function 
“f1” lights up  “f1” lights out 
Speed search 
function 
“g1” lights up  “g1” lights out 
n013 
Winding mode 
pause function 
“h1” lights up  “h1” lights out 





5. Control Status Monitor 
78
 
 
n014 
n015 
n016 
PID Setting Value (SP) 
PID Measured Value (PV) 
PID Output Value (MV) 
For displaying setting value (SP), measured value (PV) and output value (MV) 
under PID control. The unit is “%”. 
 
n017  Progress of Automatic Tuning 
For showing progress of automatic tuning when automatic tuning is set with 
“P106: PID Control Mode”.   
The initial value is “0” and “1” to “5” is displayed depending on the progress. 
When automatic tuning completes, the display will return to initial value “0”. 
 
“0” to “5”: measurement in progress; “6”: measurement completed (End); “7”: 
measurement stopped (Err) 
 
n018 
n019 
Accumulative Operation Time 
Accumulative Operation Time of Fan 
“n018” shows the accumulative power-on time of inverter. “n019” shows the 
accumulative operation time of inverter cooling fan. “P143: Cooling Fan 
ON-OFF Control” is set to “1”: In synchronized operation, no counting will be 
executed when the cooling fan is stopped. 
The basic display unit is “0.001” corresponding to 1 hour. The display increment 
is “0.01” corresponding to 10 hours for the time longer than 10.0; and “0.1” 
corresponding to 100 hours for the time longer than 100.0; and “1” 
corresponding to 1000 hours for the time longer than 1000.0. 
As certain errors exist in the displayed values, they are just for your reference. 





5. Control Status Monitor 
79
 
n020 
n021 
n022 
n023 
Abnormality Display 1 (Latest) 
Abnormality Display 2 (Second to Latest) 
Abnormality Display 3 (Third to Latest) 
Abnormality Display 4 (Fourth to latest) 
For showing abnormality information of inverter (latest, second to latest, third to 
latest and fourth to latest).





5. Control Status Monitor 
80 
n024 
n025 
Unit Version 
Panel Version
 
·They show the firmware versions of VF200 unit and operation panel. 
n026 
Pulse Input Signal Detection Value
 
·Display frequency detection value for pulse input signal of inverter.
n027 
Winding Length
 
·It is used for the calculate result for winding length of pulse input signal when 
the setting vale for "P036:SW1 Function Select" is 14.
・The calculate result of winding length is as follow.
・The relation of winding and display is as follow.
When 1m to 9,999m, display as 1 to 9999.
When 10,000m to 99,999m, display as 10.00 to 9.999.
When 100,000m to 600,000m, display as 10.00 to 60.00.
・If set value of "P038:SW3 Function Select" as 14, the calculate value will be 
cleared when SW3 is ON.
·The model code and version code are shown as follows.   
 
 
About the version of VF200 unit and operation panel 
·Operation status display varies depending on the combination of firmware 
version of VF200 unit and operation panel.   
Combination of firmware 
versions 
Operation 
VF200 unit firmware version > 
operation panel firmware 
version (VF200 unit version 
Ver.1.0X excluded) 
“Er2” will be displayed on the operation panel.   
Press “↑” button to display VF200 unit firmware version. 
Press “↓” button to display the operation panel firmware 
version. 
VF200 unit firmware version ≤ 
operation panel firmware 
version 
The version will be displayed as shown in the above figure.   
Winding Length=
(pulse value input to SW1)×(P181: Winding length radio)
1000





81
 
6
Function Parameters
6.1 Setting and Changing Function Parameters .................8/
6.2 Function Parameter List ................................................83





6. Function Parameters 
82 
6.1 Setting and Changing Function Parameters 
 
Parameters can be set and monitored in Custom Mode and Function Setting 
Mode. Be sure to change and set various function parameters in stop status. 
And note that some function parameters can be changed during operation. 
 
6.1.1 Setting and Changing Function Parameters in 
Stop Status 
 
Setting Example 
Change the maximum output frequency from 50.0 Hz to 60.0 Hz (change 
setting value of parameter P008 from “50.0” to “60.0”).   
1. Press 
  button to stop the inverter.   
 
2. Press 
  button five times to select Function Setting 
Mode.  
(If a password is set beforehand, please enter it. Refer to 
parameter P150.) 
 
3. Press 
  button seven times to change parameter No.   
to “P008”.   
 
4. Press 
  button to display setting value of parameter 
P008.  
(The display part is flickering.) 
 
5. Press 
  button to change the displayed value to “60”. 
(The display part is flickering.) 
 
6. Press 
  button to apply the value.   
 
7.
 
Press 
 button. 
(If the built-in memory setting mode is set to “conceal”,   
the inverter enters “operation ready” status.) 
 





6. Function Parameters 
83 
8.
 
Press    button to enter “operation ready” status.   
That’s to say, the inverter is in normal stop status and can 
be operated if required. (Operation Status Display Mode) 
 
 
 
• If data is written into the built-in non-volatile memory of inverter when setting 
and changing operation, it can be stored even if the power is cut off. The built-in 
non-volatile memory of inverter can be written up to100,000 times. Therefore, 
do not change parameter settings frequently.   
• If you change the parameters that cannot be set during operation when the 
operation signal is ON, “P.Err” will flicker in the display part first. And after 2 s, 
the display will return to parameter No. again. That’s to say, the inverter start
s 
operation without changing
 the parameter. 
 
 
 
 
 
 





6. Function Parameters 
84 
6.1.2 Setting and Changing Function Parameters 
During Operation 
 
 
If data is changed during operation, the motor and motor 
load may suddenly start/stop for the great fluctuation. 
(Please take measures to ensure personal safety.) 
Failure to do so may result in injury.   
 
For function parameters that can be changed during operation, refer to items 
marked with “” in “Changeable during Operation” of “6.2 Function Parameter 
List”.  
 
Setting Example 
Change the 1
st
 deceleration time from 5.0 s to 10.0 s (change setting value of 
parameter P002 from “5.0” to “10.0”) 
 
Controlling motor with current data 
1. Confirm operation status (For operation at 50.0 Hz).   
2. Press    button five times to select Function Setting 
Mode.  
(If a password is set beforehand, please enter it. Refer to 
parameter P150. ) 
3. Press    button once to change parameter No. to 
“P002”.  
4. Press    button to display setting value of parameter 
P002.  
(The display part is flickering.) 
5. Press    button to change the displayed value to “10.0”. 
(The display part is flickering.) 





6. Function Parameters 
85 
  atad wen htiw rotom gnillortnoC
1. Press 
  button to set the value.   
2.
 
Press    button. (If the built-in memory setting mode is 
set to “conceal”, the inverter enters Operation Status 
Display Mode.) 
3.
 
Press    button to switch to Operation Status Display 
Mode.   
(If 
  button is not pressed, the display will not be 
switched.) 
 
 
• When “The 2
nd
 to 16
th
 Speed Frequency” of parameter P046 to P060 are set 
to “0000”, the inverter will enter 0V stop status.   
If parameters “P103: Bias Frequency Setting” and “P126: The 2
nd
 Bias 
Frequency Setting” are set to "0" or lower, the inverter will enter 0V stop status.   
If parameters “P104: Gain Frequency Setting” and “P127: The 2
nd
 Gain 
Frequency Setting" are set to “0000”, the inverter will enter 0V stop status.   
(The motor will start or stop when the data is changed or set to “0000”, so 
always ensure personal safety before operation.) 
• If you 
monitor parameters that cannot be set during operation when the 
operation signal is OFF, the setting values will flicker and then become 
changeable. 
 
 
 
 
 





6. Function Parameters 
86 
6.2 Function Parameter List 
 
Function parameter list of inverter VF200 is as follows. 
No.  Function name 
Changeable 
during 
operation 
Setting range  Unit Initial value
Reference 
page 
P001  The 1
st
 Acceleration Time    0000,0.1 to 3600
5.0 
P.140 
P002  The 1
st
 Deceleration Time    0000,0.1 to 3600
5.0 
P.141
P003  Run Command Select 
 
0 to 7 
- 0 
P.142
P004  Frequency Setting Signal 
 
0 to 8 
- 0 
P.144
P005  V/F Mode 
50·60·FF·3C·3C1~3C6
- 50 
P.147
P006  V/F Curve   
  0·1  - 0 
P.150
P007  Torque Boost  *3  Auto·0 to 40 
% 
5 
(1-phase)
4 
(3-phase)
P.151
P008  Max. Output Frequency 
  50.0 to 400.0  Hz  50.0  P.153
P009  Base Frequency 
  45.0 to 400.0  Hz  50.0  P.153
P010  Change Point Frequency 1
0.5 to 400.0  Hz  0.5  P.154
P011  Change Point Voltage 1 
0 to 100  %  00  P.154
P012  Change Point Frequency 2
0.5 to 400.0  Hz  0.5  P.154
P013  Change Point Voltage 2 
0 to 100  %  0  P.154
P014  Max. Output Voltage 
  0 to 500  V  0  P.155
P015 
S-shaped 
Acceleration/Deceleration 
Mode 
 
0 to 2 
-  0  P.156
P016  Electronic Thermal Select 
0 to 3  -  2  P.157
P017  Thermal Current Setting 
0.1 to 100.0  A  *1 P.157
P018 
Overcurrent Stall 
Prevention Function 
0 to 3  -  1  P.158
P019 
Overvoltage Stall 
Prevention Function 
0·1  -  1  P.159
P020  Current Limit Function 
0 to 9.9  sec  0  P.160
P021  OCS Level 
1 to 200  %  140  P.161
P022  Retry Function 
0 to 3  -  0  P.162
P023  Retry Count  1 to 10  Times 1  P.162
P024  Start Mode 
0 to 3  -  1  P.163
sec
sec





6. Function Parameters 
87 
No.  Function name 
Changeable 
during 
operation 
Setting range  Unit Initial value
Reference 
page 
P025 
Ride-through Restart 
Select 
  0 to 3  -  0  P.165
P026  Waiting Time  0.1 to 100.0
0.1 
sec
P.167
P027  Reverse Run Lock 
  0·1  -  0 
P.167
P028  Stop Mode 
  0·1  -  0 
P.167
P029  Start Frequency 
0.5 to 60.0  Hz  0.5  P.168
P030  Stop Frequency 
0.5 to 60.0  Hz  0.5  P.168
P031  DC Brake Time 
0 to 120.0  sec 0  P.169
P032  DC Brake Level 
0 to 100  %  0  P.169
P033 
Stop Frequency during 
Forward/Reverse Run 
Operation 
0.5 to 60.0  Hz  0.5  P.170
P034 
DC Brake Time during 
Forward/Reverse Run 
Operation 
0 to 120.0 
sec
0  P.170
P035 
DC Brake Level during 
Forward/Reverse Run 
Operation 
0 to 100  %  0  P.170
P036  SW1 Function Select 
  0 to 14 
-
  0  P.172
P037  SW2 Function Select 
  0 to 13 
-
  0  P.172
P038  SW3 Function Select 
  0 to 14 
-
  0  P.172
P039  SW4 Function Select 
  0 to 13 
-
  0  P.172
P040  SW5 Function Select 
  0 to 13 
-
  0  P.172
P041  Input Logic Setting 
  0 to 31 
-
  0  P.189
P042  JOG Frequency 
  0.5 to 400.0  Hz  10.0  P.190
P043  JOG Acceleration Time 
  0.0 to 3600  sec 5.0  P.190
P044  JOG Deceleration Time 
  0.0 to 3600  sec 5.0  P.190
P045 
Multi-speed Function 
Select 
  0 to 6  -  0  P.191
P046  The 2
nd
 Speed Frequency   
0000,0.5 to 
400.0 
Hz  5.0  P.204
P047  The 3
rd
 Speed Frequency   
0000,0.5 to 
400.0 
Hz  10.0  P.204
P048  The 4
th
 Speed Frequency   
0000,0.5 to 
400.0 
Hz  12.5  P.204





6. Function Parameters 
88 
No.  Function name 
Changeable 
during 
operation 
Setting range  Unit Initial value
Reference 
page 
P049  The 5
th
 Speed Frequency 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  15.0  P.204
P050  The 6
th
 Speed Frequency 
 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  17.5  P.204
P051  The 7
th
 Speed Frequency 
 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  20.0  P.204
P052  The 8
th
 Speed Frequency 
 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  22.5  P.204
P053  The 9
th
 Speed Frequency 
 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  25.0  P.204
P054  The 10
th
 Speed Frequency
 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  27.5  P.204
P055  The 11
th
 Speed Frequency
 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  30.0  P.204
P056  The 12
th
 Speed Frequency
 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  32.5  P.204
P057  The 13
th
 Speed Frequency
 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  35.0  P.204
P058  The 14
th
 Speed Frequency
 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  40.0  P.204
P059  The 15
th
 Speed Frequency
 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  45.0  P.204
P060  The 16
th
 Speed Frequency
 
0000,0.5 to 400.0
Hz  50.0  P.204
P061  The 2
nd
 Acceleration Time    0.1 to 3600
5.0  P.204
P062  The 2
nd
 Deceleration Time    0.1 to 3600
5.0  P.204
P063  The 3
rd
 Acceleration Time    0.1 to 3600
5.0  P.204
P064  The 3
rd
 Deceleration Time    0.1 to 3600
5.0  P.204
P065  The 4
th
 Acceleration Time    0.1 to 3600
5.0  P.204
P066  The 4
th
 Deceleration Time    0.1 to 3600
5.0  P.204
P067 
Rotation Direction of Timer 
Operation 
  0 to 255  -  0  P.205
P068 
Continuous Operation 
Times of Timer 
0000·1 to 9999 
Times
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
1  P.206
P069 
Continuous Operation 
Mode of Timer 
0·1  -  0  P.206
P070 
Continuous Waiting Time 
of Timer Operation 
0000·0.1 to 6553 
sec
0000  P.206
P071  The 1
st
 Speed Runtime 
0000·0.1 to 6553 
sec 0000  P.208





6. Function Parameters 
89 
No.  Function name 
Changeable 
during 
operation 
Setting range  Unit Initial value
Reference 
page 
P072  The 2
nd
 Speed Runtime 
0000·0.1 to 6553 
sec
0000  P.208
P073  The 3
rd
 Speed Runtime 
0000·0.1 to 6553 
sec
0000  P.208
P074  The 4
th
 Speed Runtime 
0000·0.1 to 6553 
sec
0000  P.208
P075  The 5
th
 Speed Runtime 
0000·0.1 to 6553 
sec
0000  P.208
P076  The 6
th
 Speed Runtime 
0000·0.1 to 6553 
sec
0000  P.208
P077  The 7
th
 Speed Runtime 
0000·0.1 to 6553 
sec
0000  P.208
P078  The 8
th
 Speed Runtime 
0000·0.1 to 6553 
sec
0000  P.208
P079 
The 1
st
 Speed Pulse Input 
Times 
0000·1 to 65530  Times
0000  P.209
P080 
The 2
nd
 Speed Pulse Input 
Times 
0000·1 to 65530  Times
0000  P.209
P081 
The 3
rd
 Speed Pulse Input 
Times 
0000·1 to 65530  Times
0000  P.209
P082 
The 4
th
 Speed Pulse Input 
Times 
0000·1 to 65530  Times
0000  P.209
P083 
The 5
th
 Speed Pulse Input 
Times 
0000·1 to 65530  Times
0000  P.209
P084 
The 6
th
 Speed Pulse Input 
Times 
0000·1 to 65530  Times
0000  P.209
P085 
The 7
th
 Speed Pulse Input 
Times 
0000·1 to 65530  Times
0000  P.209
P086 
The 8
th
 Speed Pulse Input 
Times 
0000·1 to 65530  Times
0000  P.209
P087 
PWM/Pulse Input Frequency 
Signal Select 
0·1·2 -  0  P.210
P088 
PWM Signal Average Times
1 to 100 
Times
1  P.211
P089  PWM Signal Cycle 
1.0 to 2000
P090 
Output TR1 Function 
Select 
0 to 13  -  0  P.212
P091 
Output TR2 Function 
Select 
0 to 12  -  0  P.212
P092 
Output RY Function Select
0 to 12, r0 to r12  -  7  P.214
P093 
Sensing Frequency 
(Output TR) 
0000, 0.5 to 400.0
Hz  0.5  P.216
P094 
Sensing Frequency 
(Output RY) 
0000,0.5 to 
400.0 
Hz  0.5  P.216
 msec 1.0  P.211





6. Function Parameters 
90 
No.  Function name 
Changeable 
during 
operation 
Setting range  Unit Initial value
Reference 
page 
P095  Current Sensing Level 
0.1 to 100.0  A  *1  P.217 
P096 
Current Sensing Delay 
Time 
0.1 to 10.0
0.1  P.217
P097 
Analog and PWM Output 
Function Select 
0·1  -  0  P.217
P098 
Analog and PWM Output 
Voltage Compensation 
  25 to 100 
sec
  100  P.219
P099  Lower Frequency Limit  0.5 to 400.0 
Hz  0.5  P.219
P100  Upper Frequency Limit  0.5 to 400.0 
Hz  400.0  P.219
P101  0V Stop Function Select 
0000,0.5 to 400.0 Hz  0.5  P.220
P102  Bias/Gain Function Select 
  0·1  -  0  P.221
P103  Bias Frequency Setting 
  -99.0 to 250.0  %  0  P.221
P104  Gain Frequency Setting 
  0.0 to 500.0  %  100  P.221
P105  Analog Input Filter 
  5 to 200 
Times
10  P.222
P106  PID Control Mode 
  0 to 3, A0 to A3  -  0  P.223
P107  Proportional Gain [Kp]    0.1 to 1000 
-  1  P.225
P108  Integral Time [Ti] 
 
0000·0.1 to 3600 
sec
0  P.225
P109  Derivative Time [Td] 
 
0000·0.1 to 3600 
sec
0  P.225
P110  Control Cycle [Ts] 
  0.01 to 60.00 
sec
0.01  P.225
P111  PID Target Value 
  0.0 to 100.0  %  100.0  P.225
P112  The 1
st
 Skip Frequency 
0000,0.5 to 
400.0 
Hz  0000  P.229
P113  The 2
nd
 Skip Frequency 
0000,0.5 to 
400.0 
Hz  0000  P.229
P114  The 3
rd
 Skip Frequency 
0000,0.5 to 
400.0 
Hz  0000  P.229
P115 
Skip Frequency Band 
Width 
0 to 10  Hz  0  P.229
P116  The 2
nd
 Base Frequency 
 
45.0 to 400.0 
Hz  50.0  P.230
P117  The 2
nd
 Torque Boost  *6  Auto
·
0 to 40 
% 
5 
(1-phase)
4 
(3-phase)
P.231
P118 
The 2
nd
 Electronic Thermal 
Select 
0 to 3 
-  2  P.233





6. Function Parameters 
91 
No.  Function name 
Changeable 
during 
operation 
Setting range  Unit Initial value
Reference 
page 
P119 
The 2
nd
 Thermal Current 
Setting 
0.1 to 100.0 
A  *1  P.233
P120 
The 2
nd
 Change Point 
Frequency 1 
0.5 to 400.0 
Hz  0.5  P.235
P121 
The 2
nd 
Change Point 
Voltage 1 
0 to 100 
%  0  P.235
P122 
The 2
nd
 Change Point 
Frequency 2 
0.5 to 400.0 
Hz  0.5  P.235
P123 
The 2
nd 
Change Point 
Voltage 2 
0 to 100 
%  0  P.235
P124 
The 2
nd
 Analog Input 
Function Select 
 
0·1·2·3  - 
0 
P.237 
P125 
The 2
nd
 Analog Input 
Signal Select 
 
3 to 6 
-  3  P.240
P126 
The 2
nd
 Bias Frequency 
Setting 
  -99.0 to 250.0 
%  0  P.241
P127 
The 2
nd
 Gain Frequency 
Setting 
  0.0 to 500.0 
%
sec
  100  P.241
P128  Carrier Frequency 
  0.8 to 10.0  kHz 2.5  P.243
P129  Vector Control Select 
  0·1  -  0  P.244
P130  Motor Capacity 
  0.4 to 15  -  *1  P.247
P131  Motor Poles Number 
 
2·4·6  - 
4 
P.247
P132 
Motor Constant Measuring 
Function 
  0·1 to 3  -  0  P.248
P133 
Voltage Compensation 
Constant 
  0.01 to 99.99  V  *1  P.251
P134 
Slip Compensation 
Frequency 
  -5.00 to 5.00  Hz  *1  P.253
P135 
Communication Protocol 
Select 
0·1  -  0 *2  P.254
P136 
Communication Station 
No. Setting 
01 to 31  -  01 *2  P.254
P137 
Communication Speed 
Setting 
4800·9600· 
19200·38400 
bps  96 *2  P.254
P138  Stop Bit Length 
1·2  -  1 *2  P.254
P139  Parity Check 
0 to 2  -  0 *2  P.254
P140  Timeout Sensing 
0000·0.1 to 60.0
0000 *2  P.254





6. Function Parameters 
92 
No.  Function name 
Changeable 
during 
operation 
Setting range  Unit Initial value
Reference 
page 
P141  Wait-to-send Time 
1 to 1000
P.254
P142 
Judging Time for TEXT 
Completion 
3 to 200
P.254
P143 
Cooling Fan ON-OFF 
Control Select 
0 to 3  -  0  P.256
P144  Input Terminal Filter 
5 to 100 
Times
20  P.256
P145  Operation Status Monitor 
  0 to 7  -  0  P.257
P146  Linear Speed Multiplier 
  0.1 to 100.0  -  3  P.258
Alarm LED Operation 
Select 
  0 to 6 
-
  0  P.258
Upper Voltage Limit of 
Alarm LED 
V  550.0  P.259
Upper Current Limit of 
Alarm LED 
A  *1  P.260
P150 
Password 
0000·1 to 9999 
-
  0000  P.260
P151 
Setting Data Clear 
  0·1·2·3  -  0 
P.261
P152 
DC Brake Time during 
Startup 
  0000·0.1 to 120
0000  P.261
P153 
DC Brake Level during 
Startup 
0 to 100  %  0  P.261
P154  MOP Function Select 
-  0·1·2  -  0  P.264
P155 
Acceleration/deceleration 
Time for MOP Operation 
  0000·0.1 to 3600
0.5  P.264
P156 
Slip Compensation 
Control 
  0·1·2  -  0  P.266
P157 
The 2
nd
 Analog 
Superimposed Value 
  -100.0 to 100.0 
%  0  P.267
P158  The 2
nd
 Motor Capacity 
 
0.4 to 15 
-  *1  P.267
P159 
The 2
nd
 Motor Pole 
 
2·4·6  - 
4 
P.267
P160 
The 2
nd
 Voltage 
Compensation Constant 
 
0.01 to 99.99 
-  *1  P.268
P161 
The 2
nd
 Slip Compensation 
Frequency 
 
-5.00 to 5.00 
-  *1  P.268
P162 
Speed Search Select 
during Startup 
  0·1  -  0  P.268
Number 
P147 
P148    0.1 to 600.0 
P149    0.1 to 100.0 
msec
msec
sec
sec
1 *2
3 *2





6. Function Parameters 
93
No.  Function name 
Changeable 
during 
operation 
Setting range  Unit Initial value
Reference 
page 
P163 
Waiting Time to Speed 
Search 
  0.0 to 100.0
0.5  P.269
P164 
Voltage Recover Time for 
Speed Search 
  0.1 to 10.0
0.5  P.269
P165 
Speed Search Select 
during Retry
0·1 
sec
sec
-  0  P.270
P166 
Speed Search Retry 
Select 
0·1  -  0  P.270
P167 
Speed Search Retry 
Times 
0 to 10  Times  0  P.270
P168 
Upper Frequency Limit 
Select for Speed Search 
0·1  - 
0 
P.271
P169 
Winding Mode Control 
Select 
0·1·2  -  0  P.271
P170 
Amplitude in Winding 
Mode 
0.0 to 100.0 
%  50.0  P.271
P171 
Recoil Frequency Band in 
Winding Mode
0.0 to 100.0 
%  10.0  P.272
P172  Winding Mode Cycle
0.0 to 3000.0 
sec
10.0  P.272
P173 
Rise Time Coefficient in 
Winding Mode
0.0 to 100.0 
%  50.0  P.272
 
*1: The initial values of such parameters vary depending on the ratings of 
inverter.   
*2: As for parameter P135 to P142, the changed values will apply when the  
power is turned ON from OFF. 
*3: The change from manual torque boost to auto torque boost or vice versa 
cannot be made during operation. 
P174 
Pulse Input Signal Frequency
1 to 10000
Hz
1000
P175  Pulse Input Signal Bias 
-99.0 to 100.0 
% 
0.0 
P176 Pulse Input Signal Gain
0.0 to 100.0 
% 
100.0
P177  Pulse Input Signal
10 to 100
msec 
50.0
P178 
Winding Mode Operation Select
0 to 3
-
-
0
P179  Max random rise time
0 to 100.0 
% 
50
P180  Minimum random rise time
0 to 100.0 
%  
50
P181  Winding length multiplier
0 to 9999 1
P182  Winding stop length
0·1 to 60.00
m
0
P.273
P.273
P.273
P.274
P.275
P.275 
P.275
P.275
P.272





6. Function Parameters 
94 
 
 





95
 
7
Custom Mode
7.1 Allocating Parameter No. ............................................96
7.2 Setting and Changing Parameters .............................98
 





7. Custom Mode 
96 
7.1 Allocating Parameter No. 
 
“Custom Mode” allows selection of up to 10 function parameters changed 
frequently by customer, thus making data modification easier. 
The number “1” to “10” can be allocated as custom parameter No. The 
allocated data will be written into built-in non-volatile memory of inverter. Even 
if the power is cut off, the data will still be held. (The built-in non-volatile 
memory of inverter can be written up to100,000 times. Therefore, do not 
allocate the function parameter No. frequently. ) 
 
■ Setting Example 
Allocate function parameter “P002” (The 1
st
 Deceleration Time) to custom 
parameter “U001”. 
1. Confirm operation status (i.e., stop status or 
operation status) (For operation at 50.0 Hz).   
2. Press    button four times to select Custom Mode. 
3. Press    button to confirm the current allocated parameter 
No.  
* When function parameter No. in custom mode is displayed, 
a dot will appear behind the letter “P” (i.e., “P.”).   
(If a password is set beforehand, please enter it. Refer to 
parameter P150. ) 
4.
 
Press and hold    button for 3 s to enter allocation setting 
status. (The digital part is flickering.) 
5.
 
Press    button once to change parameter No. to “P.002”.   





7. Custom Mode 
97 
6. Press    button to complete allocation of parameter No.   
 
Initial settings of custom parameters No.1 to No.10 are shown in the following 
table.  
Custom parameter 
No. 
Function Parameter 
No. 
Function name 
Initial 
value 
Reference 
page 
U001 P001 
The 1
st
 Acceleration 
Time 
5.0 
P.142 
U002 P002 
The 1
st
 Deceleration 
Time 
5.0 
P.143 
U003 P007 
Torque Boost 
4 
P.153 
U004 P003 
Run Command Select 
0 
P.144 
U005 P004 
Frequency Setting 
Signal 
0 P.146 
U006 P008 
Max. Output Frequency 
50.0 P.155 
U007 P009 
Base Frequency 
50.0 P.155 
U008 P145 
Operation Status 
Monitor 
0 P.259 
U009 P147 
Alarm LED Operation 
Select 
0 P.260 
U010 P150 
Password 
0000 P.262 
To restore the initial settings of allocated custom parameters No.1 to No.10, 
please set the function parameter “P151: Setting Data Clear” to “3”.    (The data 
is not changed.) 
 
 
·Since all the allocated contents to custom parameters are stored in operation 
panel, they will remain valid even if the panel is removed and connected to 
other inverters.   
·All data, except those that can be changed during operation, can only be 
monitored during operation.   





7. Custom Mode 
98 
7.2 Setting and Changing Parameters 
 
The section describes the method of setting, changing and confirming function 
parameters allocated to custom parameter No. For function parameters that 
can be changed during operation, refer to items in “Changeable during 
Operation” of “6.2 Function Parameter List”.   
 
 
If data is changed during operation, the motor and motor 
load may suddenly start/stop for the great fluctuation. 
(Please take measures to ensure personal safety.) 
Failure to do so may result in injury.   
 
■ Setting Example 
Change the setting of parameter “P002” (The 1
st
 Deceleration Time) allocated 
to custom parameter “U001” from “5.0” to “10.0” 
1. Confirm operation status (i.e., stop status or 
operation status) (For operation at 50.0 Hz).   
2. Press    button four times to select Custom Mode. 
3. Press    button to confirm the current allocated parameter 
No.  
*When function parameter No. in custom mode is 
displayed, a dot will appear behind the letter “P” (i.e., “P.”). 
(If a password is set beforehand, please enter it. Refer to 
parameter P150. ) 
4. Press    button to display setting value of parameter 
P008. (The display part is flickering.) 
5. Press    button to change the displayed value to “10.0”. 
(The display part is flickering.) 





7. Custom Mode 
99 
6. Press    button to apply the value.   
If data is changed during operation, the unit will start 
operation with the new data.   
 
 
 
 
·All data, except those that can be changed during operation, can only be 
monitored during operation.   





7. Custom Mode 
100 
 





101
 
8
Setting Modes and Copy
Functions of Built-in Memory
8.1 
Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory
... 102
8.2 Setting Built-in Memory Parameters.......................... 103
8.3 Parameter Upload Function (CPY1).......................... 105
8.4 Parameter Download Function (CPY2)
....................... 107
8.5 Parameter Verification Function................................. 109
8.6 
To Display or Conceal Built-in Memory Setting Mode
... 111





8. Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory 
102
8.1 Setting Modes and Copy Functions of 
Built-in Memory 
 
For VF200 inverter, both of its unit and operation panel are equipped with 
built-in memory as well as “Parameter Copy Function”. When operation panel 
is removed, the data inside can be copied to other inverter units. 
The inverter provides up to 4 parameter copy functions, which are located 
behind P182 in “Function Setting Mode” and displayed as “CPY1” to “CPY4”. 
They can be enabled only by changing setting data. In addition, data in build-in 
memory of panel can be checked in “Built-in Memory Setting 
Mode”.   
 
Copy 
parameter 
No. 
Function name  Details 
Reference 
page 
CPY1  Upload function 
To upload parameter settings 
from the unit to built-in memory 
of operation panel. 
P.107 
CPY2  Download function 
To download parameter settings 
from built-in memory of 
operation panel to the unit.   
P.109 
CPY3  Verification function 
To check if function parameters 
in the unit are identical to those 
in built-in memory of operation 
panel.   
P.111 
CPY4 
Built-in memory setting 
mode display select 
To determine whether to display 
built-in memory setting mode or 
not.   
P.113 
 





8. Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory 
103
8.2 Setting Built-in Memory Parameters 
 
The contents of built-in memory parameters “E001” to “E182” are identical to 
those of function parameters “P001” to “P182”. The setting value of build-in 
memory parameter can be changed in “Built-in Memory Setting Mode”.   
 
 Setting Example 
Change the maximum output frequency from 50.0 Hz to 60.0 Hz (change 
setting value of built-in memory parameter E008 from “50.0” to “60.0”). 
1. Press 
  button to stop the inverter.   
2.
 
Press    button four times.   
(If a password is set beforehand, please enter it. Refer to 
parameter P150. ) 
3. Press    button twice to select Built-in Memory Setting 
Mode.   
(If the mode is not displayed, set function copy function 4 to 
“E2P”.) 
4. Press    button seven times to change the built-in 
memory parameter No. to “E008”.   
5. Press    button to display setting value of built-in memory 
parameter E008. (The display part is flickering.) 
6. Press    button to change the displayed value to 
“60.0”.(The display part is flickering.) 
7. Press    button to apply the value.   
8.
 
Press    button to enter “operation ready” status.   
That’s to say, the inverter is in normal stop status and can be 
operated if required. (Operation Status Display Mode) 





8. Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory 

 
y Setting values of function parameters in the unit connected with operation 
panel will remain unchanged even those in built-in memory are changed. 
y The data is written into built-in non-volatile memory of operation panel during 
setting and changing operation, so it can be held even if the power is cut off.   
 





8. Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory 
105
8.3 Parameter Upload Function (CPY1) 
 
Refers to the function of uploading all function parameters in connected unit to 
built-in memory of operation panel. The upload operation will start after setting 
value “UPL” is set.   
 
 How to upload function parameters 
1. Press 
  button to stop the inverter.   
2.
 
Press    button four times.   
(If a password is set beforehand, please enter it. Refer to 
parameter P150. ) 
3.
 
Press    button. 
4. Press 
 
/ 
  button to select “CPY1”.   
(“CPY1” is located behind “P182”.) 
5.
 
Press    button. (Display the current settings.) 
6. Press    button to change the displayed value to “UPL”. 
7. Press    button to start upload.   
The displayed value (UPL) is flickering during upload. 
→After upload completion, “End” is displayed.   
8.
 
Press    button. (Make displaying switched to CPY2.) 
9.
 
Press    button to enter “operation ready” status.   
That’s to say, the inverter is in normal stop status and can be 
operated if required. (Operation Status Display Mode) 
 
 





8. Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory 

 
y The upload function cannot be used during operation. Be sure to use it in stop 
status.  
y After upload completion, setting values of parameters in built-in memory are 
identical to those in the unit.   
y During upload, the inverter will not start operation even if an operation signal 
enters. And only after upload completion (i.e., with “End” displaying) and SET 
button is pressed, the inverter will enter “operation ready” status.   
y The data is written to built-in non-volatile memory of operation panel during 
data upload, so it can be held even if the power is cut off.   
 
 
 





8. Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory 

8.4 Parameter Download Function (CPY2) 
 
Refers to the function of changing setting values of all function parameters in 
the unit to those in built-in memory of connected operation panel. The 
download operation will start after setting value “dOL” is set.   
 
 How to download parameters in built-in memory 
1. Press 
  button to stop the inverter.   
2.
 
Press    button four times.   
(If a password is set beforehand, please enter it. Refer to 
parameter P150. ) 
3.
 
Press   button. 
4. Press 
 
/ 
  button to select “CPY2”.   
5.
 
Press    button. (Display the current settings.) 
6. Press    button to change the displayed value to “dOL”. 
7. Press    button to start download.   
The displayed value (dOL) is flickering during download. 
After the download completion, “End” is displayed.   
8.
 
Press    button. (Make displaying switched to CPY3.) 
9.
 
Press    button to enter “operation ready” status.   
That’s to say, the inverter is in normal stop status and can be 
operated if required. (Operation Status Display Mode) 
 
 
 





8. Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory 

 
y The download function cannot be used during operation. Be sure to use it in 
stop status.   
y After download completion, all setting values of parameters in built-in 
memory are identical to those in the unit. 
y During download, the inverter will not start operation even if an operation 
signal enters. And only after download completion (i.e., with “End” displaying) 
and SET button is pressed, the inverter will enter “operation ready” status.   
y The data is written to built-in non-volatile memory in unit during data 
download, so it can be held even if the power is cut off. The built-in non-volatile 
memory of unit can be written up to 100,000 times, so please note the 
download times. 
 
 
 





8. Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory 
109 
8.5 Parameter Verification Function 
 
Refers to the function of making comparison and verification between setting 
values of function parameters in the unit and those in built-in memory of 
operation panel. The comparison and verification will start after setting value 
“VEr” is set.   
 How to verify the parameters 
1. Press 
  button to stop the inverter.   
2.
 
Press    button four times.   
(If a password is set beforehand, please enter it. Refer to 
parameter P150. ) 
3.
 
Press    button. 
4. Press 
 
/ 
  button to select “CPY3”.   
5.
 
Press    button.(Display the current settings.) 
6. Press    button to change the displayed value to “VEr”. 
7. Press    button to start verification.   
The displayed value (VEr) is flickering during verification. 
 If different data is checked out, displayed parameter No. will 
flicker.   
 In this case, press   
 
button to display data in the unit 
while 
 
button to display data in built-in memory of 
operation panel.   
 
Press 
 
button to start verification from the next data again. 
 Press 
 
button to stop verification and “CPY3” is displayed. 
 
After verification completion, “End” is displayed.   
●  If different data is checked out 





8. Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory 

8.
 
Press    button.(Make displaying switched to CPY4.) 
9.
 
Press    button to enter “operation ready” status.   
That’s to say, the inverter is in normal stop status and can be 
operated if required. (Operation Status Display Mode) 
 
 
y The verification function cannot be used during operation. Be sure to use this 
function in stop status.   
y During verification, the inverter will not start operation even if an operation 
signal enters. And only after verification completion (i.e., with “End” displaying) 
and SET button is pressed, the inverter will enter “operation ready” status. 
 
 





8. Setting Modes and Copy Functions of Built-in Memory 

8.6 To Display or Conceal Built-in Memory 
Setting Mode 
 
For determining whether to display built-in memory setting mode or not. When 
copy function is unused, make setting to “conceal” for simplified operation. To 
display built-in memory setting mode, change the setting value to “E2P”; to 
conceal built-in memory setting mode, change the setting value to “OFF”.   
 
 To conceal built-in memory setting mode 
1. Press 
  button to stop the inverter.   
2.
 
Press    button four times.   
(If a password is set beforehand, please enter it. Refer to 
parameter P150. ) 
3.
 
Press   button. 
4. Press 
 
/ 
  button to select “CPY4”.   
5.
 
Press    button.(Display the current settings.) 
6. Press    button to change the displayed value to “OFF”. 
7.
 
Press   button. 
8.
 
Press    button to enter “operation ready” status.   
Operation ready status “0000” is displayed instead of “E000”. 
That’s to say, the inverter is in normal stop status and can be 
operated if required. (Operation Status Display Mode) 
 
 
y This function cannot be used during operation.Be sure to use it in stop status.   
y During the selection of built-in memory setting mode display, the inverter will 
not start operation even if an operation signal enters. And only after selection 
completion (i.e., with “OFF” or “ON” displaying) and SET button is pressed, the 
inverter will enter “operation ready” status.   





8. Setting Mode and Copy Function of Built-in Memory 
 
112  
 





113
 
9
Troubleshooting
9.1 Safety Precautions..................................................... 114
9.2
 
Abnormality Diagnostic Function and Resetting Method
...
114
9.3 Handling Abnormalities.............................................. 118





9. Troubleshooting 
114
9.1 Safety Precautions 
 
 
Wait at least five minutes after turning off the input 
power before starting maintenance and inspection work. 
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock. 
Maintenance, inspection and part replacement work 
must be done only by qualified persons.   
(Remove metal articles such as watch, bracelet(s) etc. 
before operation.) 
(Please use insulated tools.) 
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or injury. 
 
9.2 Abnormality Diagnostic Function and 
Resetting Method 
 
9.2.1 Details and Remedies for Various Fault Trips 
 
The fault trip memory stores the causes of trip in monitor modes n20 to n23.   
Even if the power is cut off, the fourth to the latest causes of trip will still be held. 
(Details of factory inspection are stored in the memory before delivery.) 
Indication  Details and causes of abnormality  Remedies 
SC1 
• Instantaneous overcurrent during 
acceleration or cooling fan malfunction 
SC2 
• Instantaneous overcurrent at constant 
speed or cooling fan malfunction 
SC3 
• Instantaneous overcurrent during 
deceleration or cooling fan malfunction 
SC4 
• Instantaneous overcurrent during 
deceleration 
SC5 
• Instantaneous overcurrent at constant 
speed  
SC6 
• Instantaneous overcurrent during 
acceleration
• Check if there is any shorted output 
or ground.   
• Remove sharp variations at load 
side.   
• Extend acceleration/deceleration 
time (parameters P001, P002 and 
P061 to P066).   
• Check the operation of cooling fan.   
• Stop open and close operation of 
magnetic contactor at load side.   
   
 





9. Troubleshooting 
115
Indication  Details and causes of abnormality  Remedies 
OC1  • Overcurrent during acceleration 
OC2  • Overcurrent at constant speed 
OC3  • Overcurrent during deceleration 
• Check output for open phase and 
remove sharp variations at load side.   
• Extend acceleration/deceleration 
time (parameters P001, P002 and 
P061 to P066).   
• Adjust torque boost level (parameter 
P007).   
• Check for restart operation during 
normal operation.   
• Stop open and close operation of 
magnetic contactor at load side.   
OU3 
• Internal DC overvoltage during 
acceleration 
• Extend acceleration time 
(parameters P001, P061, P063 and 
P065).   





9. Troubleshooting 
116
Indication  Details and causes of abnormality  Remedies 
OU2 
• Internal DC overvoltage at constant 
speed 
Remove sharp variations at load side 
(parameters P002, P062, P064 and 
P066). 
OU1 
• Internal DC overvoltage during 
deceleration 
• Extend deceleration time. 
LU 
• Power supply voltage below 85% of its 
rating 
• Measure power supply voltage and 
check input for open phase. 
• Check ride-through restart function.   
OL 
• The output current exceeds 125% of 
electronic thermal setting current or 
140% of rated current of inverter for more 
than 1 minute. 
• Check electronic thermal setting 
current. 
• Check and adjust torque boost level 
(parameter P007). 
• Reduce load. 
OH  • Heat sink overheating  • Check ambient temperature.   
AU 
• External fault stop input signal is input   
from control circuit terminals. 
• Check if the external signal is proper 
and if timing circuit is correct.   
OP 
• The power is turned ON with run signal 
ON. 
• Timeout detected 
• The communication cable comes off. 
• The operation panel comes off. 
• Check start mode (parameter P057). 
• Check communication setting and 
wiring.   
• Reduce the interference around the 
inverter.   
• Check the connection between 
operation panel and the inverter.   
FAN  • Cooling fan abnormality    • Check if the cooling fan is locked.   
SEr 
• Speed search failed 
• Incorrect motor rotation direction 
• The rating of the motor is too small 
compared with that of inverter. 
• Motor rotates slowly during normal 
operation. 
• Reduce the noise around the 
inverter.   
• Check the rotation direction of motor. 
CPU 
• Too much interference is applied to the 
inverter 
• Reduce the interference around the 
inverter. 
Er1
*
2
 
• Communication between the inverter 
unit and the operation panel failed 
• Check if the operation panel is 
connected properly to the unit. 
Er2 
• VF200 unit firmware version>Operation 
panel firmware version 
• Check the firmware version.   
*
2 
The details of abnormality corresponding to “Er1” are not displayed in monitor 
functions n020 to n023.   





9. Troubleshooting 
117 
9.2.2 Resetting Fault Trips 
 
If the abnormality indicator in the display part of operation panel lights up and 
operation is stopped, please handle the abnormality before resetting operation.   
Reset by 
power 
The reset can be made by cutting off the power once.   
(The inverter can operate when powered on again.) 
Reset by stop 
signal 
1 For the operation in panel setting mode (parameter P003 is set to “0” or 
“1”), press STOP button on operation panel to reset, and then restart the 
inverter.  
2 For the operation in external control mode (parameter P003 is set to “2” or 
“3”), turn off OPERATION COMMAND button designed for external 
control once to reset, and then restart the inverter.   
Note) Reset by stop signal cannot be made through communication. 
Reset by panel 
For the operation in external control or communication setting mode 
(parameter P003 is set to “4”, “5” or “7”), the reset cannot be made even if 
OPERATION COMMAND button designed for external control or 
communication is turned OFF once.   
Press STOP button on operation panel to reset, and then restart the 
inverter.  
Reset by 
multi-function 
terminal 
When parameter P036 to P040 are set to “1”, turn the function setting 
switch ON once and OFF again to perform the reset.   
Then restart the unit again.   
Reset by 
communication 
command 
Write 0x9696 into register No. 253 (DT253) to reset the inverter.   
 





9. Troubleshooting 
118
9.3 Handling Abnormalities 
 
9.3.1 The motor does not rotate. (When abnormality 
indicator lights out.) 
 
 
 
9.3.2 The motor does not rotate. (When abnormality 
indicator lights up.) 
 
When abnormality indicators of P.114 to P.116 light up but the motor does not 
rotate, please check out the following two items.   
1. Check whether the abnormality occurs immediately after initial installation or 
during operation.   
2. Check whether the abnormality is caused by inverter failure (defect) or 
incorrect wiring and motor failure.   
 
for P.114 and P.116





9. Troubleshooting 
119
9.3.3 Breaker Trip 
 
 
 
9.3.4 Motor Overheating 
 
 
 
9.3.5 Communication Failed 
 
 





9. Troubleshooting 
120
 





121
 
10
Maintenance and Inspection
10.1 Safety Precautions ....................................................122
10.2 Precautions on Inspection.........................................122
10.3 Inspection Items ........................................................122
10.4 Component Replacement .........................................124
10.5 Maintenance and Inspection Table............................125
 





10. Maintenance and Inspection 
 
122  
10.1 Safety Precautions 
 
 
Wait at least five minutes after turning off the input 
power before starting maintenance and inspection 
work.  
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock. 
Maintenance, inspection and part replacement work 
must be done only by qualified persons.   
(Remove metal articles such as watch, bracelet(s) etc. 
before operation.) 
(Please use insulated tools.) 
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or injury.
 
Employ an electrical engineering company to 
periodically tighten the terminal screws. 
Loose terminal screws could lead to overheating or fire.
 
 
10.2 Precautions on Inspection 
 
y To measure the insulation resistance between power supply cable and motor 
cable with megger, always disconnect the wires connected to the inverter first 
before measuring. Do not make such measurement on the control circuit. 
y The inverter is mainly consisted of semiconductor elements. To prevent the 
negative effects arising from temperature, humidity, dust and vibration etc. in 
working environment and malfunctions caused by components’ aging and 
service life, please perform daily inspection.   
The following table shows the standard replacement interval (years) under 
normal working conditions (average annual ambient temperature = 30°C, load 
factor < 80% and average daily operation period < 12 h).   
 
10.3 Inspection Items 
 
1. Daily inspection: To check if abnormality occurs during operation.   





10. Maintenance and Inspection 
 
123 
A multimeter is normally used to check input and output 
voltage of inverter during operation.   
2. Periodic inspection: To check all locations where inspection can be 
performed only when the inverter is stopped and where 
periodic inspection is required.   
 





10. Maintenance and Inspection 
 
124
10.4 Component Replacement 
 
Wear-out faults are related to endurance period and service life. The 
endurance period largely depends on the working conditions.   
1. For example, service life of relay is determined by roughness of contact 
surface.  
Contact current and load inductance are major factors affecting its service 
life. 
2. The capacitor inside the inverter is used mainly as a smoothing filter. Due to 
the chemical reaction that takes place internally, its service life is greatly 
affected by the temperature. Generally speaking, rising of 10°C in 
temperature reduces the service life of an aluminum electrolytic capacitor by 
half, which also affects the service life of inverter. 
When the inverter is used under high temperature, the aluminum electrolytic 
capacitor may suffer from wear-out faults prior to other components in 
normal status and must be replaced to extend the service life of inverter.   
Component name 
Standard 
replacement 
interval (year) 
Method of replacement/Others 
Cooling fan  5 years  Replace with a new one.   
Smoothing 
capacitor 
5 years 
Investigate and replace with a 
new one if necessary.   
Relays  - 
Investigate and replace with a 
new one if necessary.   
 
 Contact us for replacing or repairing the components.   
 





10. Maintenance and Inspection 
 
125 
10.5 Maintenance and Inspection Table 
 
Note) Symbols used in “Inspection interval” are with different meanings: ✩ for 
“daily”,  for “yearly” and  ◎  for “every two years”.   
Location 
Inspection 
item 
Inspection 
details 
Inspection 
interval 
Inspection 
method 
Judgment 
criteria 
Instrument 
Ambient 
environment 
Check the   
ambient 
temperature, 
humidity, dust 
level and etc. 
✩
  
Refer to 
“Precautions on 
Installation”.  
 
Ambient 
temperature 
and humidity: 
-10 to 
50°C,90% 
Thermometer 
Hygrometer 
Whole unit 
Check for 
abnormal 
vibration and 
noise.  
✩   
Check visually 
and listen.   
In normal 
status 
 
Whole unit 
Power 
supply 
voltage 
Check the main 
circuit voltage 
for correct.   
✩
  
Measure input 
voltage.  
200 V type: 
170 to 253     
VAC 
400 V type: 
323 to 506   
VAC 
Multimeter 
The whole 
part 
1) Check if 
fasteners are 
loose;  
2) Check if there 
is any sign of 
component 
overheating; 
3) Cleaning 
 

 
 

 
 
 

 
1) Strengthen the 
fasteners;  
2) Check visually. 
1), 2): In 
normal status
 
Main circuit 
Connected 
conductors 
and wires 
1) Check if 
conductors are 
crooked;  
2) Check if the 
wire insulation 
is broken.   
 

 
 

 
1), 2): Check 
visually. 
1), 2): In 
normal status
 





10. Maintenance and Inspection 
 
126 
Location 
Inspection 
item 
Inspection 
details 
Inspection 
interval 
Inspection 
method 
Judgment 
criteria 
Instrument 
Transformer 
Check if there is 
burning smell. 
✩
  
Just smell.   
In normal 
status 
 
Terminal 
block 
Check if there is 
sign of damage. 
    
Check visually.   
In normal 
status 
 
Transistors 
and diodes 
Check the 
resistance 
between 
terminals.  
  
◎
Disconnect the 
main circuit wires 
and measure at 
the terminals.   
 
Multimeter 
Smoothing 
capacitor 
1) Check for 
liquid leakage;   
2) Check if the 
safety valve is 
working 
correctly; 
3) Measure 
electrostatic 
capacity. 
✩
 
✩
 
 
 
 
 

 
1), 2): Check 
visually; 
 
3): Measure with 
a capacitance 
meter. 
1), 2): In 
normal 
status. 
3): Minimum 
85% of 
rated 
capacity  
Capacitance 
meter 
Relay 
1) Check if the 
operation sound 
is normal;   
2) Check the 
contact 
roughness.  
 

 
 

 
1) Just smell;   
2) Check visually. 
1), 2): In 
normal 
status. 
 
Main circuit 
Resistor 
1) Check if there 
is cracking on 
the insulation; 
2) Check if open 
circuit exists. 
 

 
 

 
1), 2): Check 
visually. 
1), 2): In 
normal status
 





10. Maintenance and Inspection 
 
127 
Location 
Inspection 
item 
Inspection 
details 
Inspection 
interval 
Inspection 
method 
Judgment 
criteria 
Instrument 
Operation 
check 
1) Check the 
balance 
condition of 
output 
voltage 
between each 
phase during 
operation of 
single unit;   
2) Inspect the 
protection 
and display 
circuit with 
timing 
protection 
operation 
test.  
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
1) Measure the 
voltage between 
output terminals;   
 
2) Simulate a 
short circuit 
condition 
between the 
inverter alarm 
outputs. 
 
1) Line 
output 
balance is 
4 V max. 
(8 V max. 
for 400 V 
type) 
2) Timing 
protection 
circuit 
must 
function 
properly.  
Rectifier 
voltmeter 
The whole 
part 
1) Check for 
strange smell 
and 
discoloration; 
2) Check if there 
is heavy 
rustling.  
 

 
 
 

 
1), 2): Smell and 
check visually. 
1), 2): In 
normal status
 
Control circuit and protection circuit 
Capacitor 
Check for liquid 
leakage and 
deformation. 
✩
 
 
Check visually.   
In normal 
status 
 
Cooling system 
Cooling fan 
1) Check for 
abnormal 
vibration and 
noise;  
2) Check if 
connected parts 
are loose.   
✩
 
 
 
 
 

 
1) Just listen;   
2) Strengthen the 
fasteners. 
1), 2): In 
normal status
 





10. Maintenance and Inspection 
 
128  
Location 
Inspection 
item 
Inspection 
details 
Inspection 
interval 
Inspection 
method 
Judgment 
criteria 
Instrument 
Display unit 
Check if the 
indicator 
malfunctions. 
✩
  
Check visually.   
In normal 
status 
 
Dispaly 
Meter 
Check if the 
indication is 
correct.  
✩
  
Check the 
indication.  
Within 
specifications 
or control 
values 
Voltmeter 
Ammeter 
Motor 
The whole 
part 
1) Check for 
abnormal 
vibration and 
noise;  
2) Check if there 
is burning smell.
✩
 
 
 
✩
  
Check visually, 
listen and smell.   
1), 2): In 
normal status
 
 





129
 
11
Specifications
11.1 Rated Specifications .................................................130
11.2 Standard Specifications ............................................132
11.3 Common Specifications ............................................133





11. Specifications 
130 
11.1 Rated Specifications 
 
• 1-phase 200 V Input Type 
Model 
Applicable 
motor output 
(kW) 
Rated output 
current 
(A) 
Rated output 
capacity (kVA) 
Note 2) 
Power supply 
capacity 
(kVA) Note 3)
Mass (kg) 
AVF200-0022  0.2  1.5  0.6  0.9  1.0 
AVF200-0042  0.4  2.5  1.0  1.3  1.0 
AVF200-0072  0.75 Note 4)  4.2  1.7  2.3  1.4 
AVF200-0152  1.5 Note 4)  7.0  2.8  3.6  1.6 
AVF200-0222  2.2  10.0  4.0  5.0  2.1 
• 3-phase 400 V Input Type 
Model 
Applicable 
motor output 
(kW) 
Rated output 
current 
(A) 
Rated output 
capacity (kVA) 
Note 2) 
Power supply 
capacity 
(kVA) Note 3)
Mass (kg) 
AVF200-0074  0.75  2.1  1.7  2.6  1.6 
AVF200-0154  1.5  4.0  3.2  4.8  1.7 
AVF200-0224 
2.2  5.5  4.4  6.4  1.9 
AVF200-0374  3.7  8.7  Note 1)  6.9  10.4  2.0 
AVF200-0554  5.5  12  Note 1)  9.6  13.6  3.5 
AVF200-0754  7.5  17  Note 1)  13.5  17.6  3.6 
AVF200-1104  11  22  Note 1)  17.5  21.1  6.8 
AVF200-1504  15  31  Note 1)  24.7  27.7  7.0 
 





11. Specifications 
131 
Note 1) Rated output current of 3.7 kW+ inverters varies with the set carrier 
frequency. Derate the output current as shown in the following figure.   
•3.7 kW to 11 kW Type  •15 kW Type 
   
Note 2) Rated output capacity: refers to the value at output voltage of 230 VAC 
for 1-phase 200 V type and the value at output voltage of 460 VAC for 
3-phase 400 V type.   
Note 3) The power supply capacity varies with source impedance. Please use 
a power supply as shown on the above table. 
 
Note 4) If excessive amount of current flows through the circuit repeatedly or 
the unit is used under high temperature, overcurrent trip may occur.   
•
 
 For 200 V/0.75 kW inverter, if the carrier frequency is above 7.5 kHz, 
overcurrent trip will occur to
 cause reduction of overcurrent protection 
capability.   
•
 
 For 200 V/1.5 kW inverter, if the carrier frequency is above 5 kHz, overcurrent 
trip will occur to cause reduction of overcurrent protection capability.   





11. Specifications 
132 
11.2 Standard Specifications 
 
• 1-phase 200 V Input Type 
Items  Specifications 
Standard output of applicable 
motor (kW) 
0.2 to 2.2 kW 
Rated voltage 
3-phase, 200 to 230 VAC (proportional to power supply 
voltage) 
Rated 
output 
Overload current rating  150% of rated output current for 1 minute 
Number of phases, 
voltage and frequency 
1-phase, 200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz 
Allowable voltage 
fluctuation 
+10% and –15% of rated input AC voltage 
Allowable frequency 
fluctuation 
±5% of rated input frequency 
Input 
power 
supply 
Instantaneous voltage 
drop ride-through 
capability 
•Operation continues when voltage is above 165 VAC. 
•Operation continues for 15 ms when voltage drops below 
165 VAC. 
• 3-phase 400 V Input Type 
Items  Specifications 
Standard output of applicable 
motor (kW) 
0.75 to 15 kW 
Rated voltage 
3-phase, 380 to 460 VAC (proportional to power supply 
voltage) 
Rated 
output 
Overload current rating  150% of rated output current for 1 minute 
Number of phases, 
voltage and frequency 
3-phase, 380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz 
Allowable voltage 
fluctuation 
+10% and –15% of rated input AC voltage 
Allowable frequency 
fluctuation 
±5% of rated input frequency 
Input 
power 
supply 
Instantaneous voltage 
drop ride-through 
capability 
•Operation continues when voltage is above 323 VAC. 
•Operation continues for 15 ms when voltage drops below 
323 VAC. 
 





11. Specifications 
133 
11.3 Common Specifications 
 
Items  Specifications 
Frequency range 
0.5 to 400 Hz 
Frequency display 
Digital display 
Frequency accuracy 
Analog setting: within ±0.5% of maximum setting 
frequency (25°C±10°C) 
Digital setting: within ±0.01% of maximum setting 
frequency (-10°C to +50°C) 
Output 
Frequency 
Frequency resolution 
Digital setting: 0.1 Hz 
Analog setting: 0.1 Hz (in 50/60 Hz mode) 
Inverter control mode 
High carrier frequency sinusoidal PWM control 
(V/F control or simple vector control is available.) 
Carrier frequency 
•V/F control setting: 7 options can be selected 
(adjustable from 0.8 to 10 kHz). 
(0.8, 1.1, 1.6, 2.5, 5.0, 7.5, 10.0 kHz) 
•Simple vector control setting: 4 options can be 
selected (adjustable from 2.5 to 10 kHz). 
Start/Stop 
•Operation panel buttons 
•1a contact signal and 3-wire input (1a and 1b 
contact signals) can be selected. 
•RS485 communication 
•Wait time (0.1 to 100 s) can be set. 
Forward/Reverse run 
•Operation panel buttons 
•1a contact signal (reverse run can be disabled.) 
•RS485 communication 
JOG operation 
Operation frequency: adjustable from 0.5 to 400 Hz 
Acceleration/deceleration time: adjustable from 
0.04 to 3600 s 
Stop mode 
Ramp-to-stop / coast-to-stop (switchable) 
Reset function 
Stop signal reset/external reset/panel reset 
(optional) / power supply reset 
Start frequency 
Adjustable from 0.5 to 60 Hz 
Operation 
Stop frequency 
Adjustable from 0.5 to 60 Hz 





11. Specifications 
134 
Items  Specifications 
Ride-through restart 
select 
0 Hz restart/operation frequency restart/speed 
search restart (switchable) 
Speed search 
Speed search during startup (optional) 
Operation 
Retry function 
Retry select: validity of function, details of retry 
faults 
Retry times: adjustable from 1 to 10 times 
Frequency setting signal 
Panel setting (operation panel): potentiometer and 
digital setting 
Analog setting signal input from external control
: 
• Potentiometer (10 kΩ, 1/4 W or higher) 
• 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC 
• 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA (An external resistor 
of 200 Ω/1/4 W or higher is connected.) 
Digital setting signal input from external control: 
• PWM signal (cycle: 0.9 to 1100 ms) or Pulse 
• Frequency rise SW/reduction SW/storage SW 
signal 
input signal 
Communication setting: RS485 
Frequency/voltage 
characteristics 
Base frequency: fixed at 50/60 Hz, adjustable from 
45 to 400 Hz 
In 3-point V/F mode: adjustable voltage and 
frequency 
V/F curve: constant/square torque mode 
(switchable) 
Torque boost 
Adjustable from 0 to 40%/auto torque boost 
(switchable) 
Acceleration/deceleration 
time 
0.04 to 3600 s (independent acceleration/ 
deceleration setting) 
Acceleration/deceleration 
characteristics 
Linear and S-shaped acceleration/deceleration 
(switchable) 
Control 
The 2
nd
 function select 
The 2
nd
 function select (acceleration/deceleration 
time, torque boost, V/F characteristics (base 
frequency/3-point V/F mode), electronic thermal 
and analog frequency setting) 





11. Specifications 
135 
Items  Specifications 
Multi-speed frequency 
setting 
•Multi-speed operation: up to 16 speed settings (No 
limitation to frequency setting) 
•Timer operation: up to 8 speed settings (No 
limitation to frequency setting) 
•Pulse input operation: up to 8 speed settings (No 
limitation to frequency setting) 
It can be linked with acceleration/ deceleration time. 
Skip frequency setting 
Up to 3 settings (skip frequency band adjustable 
from 1 to 10 Hz) 
Upper frequency limit 
setting 
Adjustable from 0.5 to 400 Hz 
Lower frequency limit 
setting 
Adjustable from 0.5 to 400 Hz 
Bias/gain frequency 
setting 
Bias frequency: adjustable from -99 to 250% 
Gain frequency: adjustable from 0 to 500% 
External stop function  External fault stop/coast-to-stop (switchable) 
PID function  PID control mode (optional) 
Automatic tuning  Automatic tuning of motor constant 
Slip compensation 
control 
Optional 
Cooling fan ON/OFF 
control 
Optional 
Control 
Communication function 
•Interface : RS485 serial communication 
•Communication speeds : 4800/9600/19200/38400 
bps (switchable) 
•Protocols : MEWTOCOL-COM/Modbus (RTU) 
(switchable) 
•Communication pattern: Half duplex 
•Maximum number of connected units: 31 
•Maximum transmission distance: 500 m (in total) 





11. Specifications 
136 
Items  Specifications 
Regenerative braking 
torque 
•200 V    0.2 kW: 100% or higher; 0.4 kW: 80% or 
higher 
0.75 to 2.2 kW: 20% or higher 
•400 V    0.75 to 15 kW: 20% or higher 
Braking 
DC braking 
Operate at the frequency below stop frequency 
•Braking torque level: 0 to 100 (20 steps adjustable)
•Braking time: adjustable from 0.1 to 120 s 
Analog output 
Output specification: 0 to 10 VDC (max. 1 mA) 
Output function: output frequency and output 
current proportion (switchable) 
Open-collector output 
Output specification: max. rating 50 VDC/50 mA 
Output functions: operation signal, arrival signal, 
overload alarm, frequency 
detection, abnormal reverse run 
signal alarm, current detection, 
timer OFF signal and    output 
frequency/current proportion 
PWM signal (cycle: 1 ms) 
(switchable) 
Output 
signal 
Relay output 
Output specification: 1c contact (contact capacity 
230 VAC, 0.3 A resistive load) 
Output functions: operation signal, arrival signal, 
overload alarm, frequency 
detection, abnormal reverse run 
signal alarm, current detection 
and timer OFF signal (switchable) 
Display 
Operation/control status 
Output frequency, linear speed display (switchable) 
and rotation direction 
Output voltage, internal DC voltage, setting 
frequency, communication station No., operation 
times of timer, alarm type, control circuit terminal 
status (I/O signal), operation status, PID (setting 
value, measured value and output value), progress 
of automatic tuning, accumulative operation time 
and accumulative operation time of fan 





11. Specifications 
137 
Items  Specifications 
 
Details of abnormality 
Specific symbol is indicated when the protection 
function is activated (the latest four abnormalities 
are stored.) 
Current limit 
Current limit can be set within 1 to 200% of rated 
output current. 
Trip (stop) 
Instantaneous overcurrent (SC1-6) and abnormal 
temperature (OH) 
Overcurrent (OC1-3), overload and electronic 
thermal relay (OL), undervoltage (LU), overvoltage 
(OU1-3), cooling fan fault (FAn), external fault (AU), 
operation fault (OP) and CPU fault (CPU) 
Protection 
Stall prevention function  Overcurrent and overvoltage stall prevention 
Ambient temperature and 
humidity 
-10 to +50°C (Note 1) (without freezing) and below 
90%RH (without condensation) 
Storage temperature and 
humidity 
-25 to +65°C and below 95%RH 
Vibration 5.9 m/s
2 
(0.6G) or lower 
Altitude 
1000 m or lower 
Environment 
Location 
Indoor areas free of corrosive gases, flammable 
gases, oil mist or dust 
Enclosure IP20 cabinet-mousssnted  
Cooling method 
•200 V    0.2 to 0.75 kW: self-cooling; 1.5 to 2.2 kW: 
air-cooling 
•400 V    0.75 kW: self-cooling; 1.5 to 15 kW: 
air-cooling 
Note 1) It is -10 to +40°C when multiple inverters are installed side-by-side. 





11. Specifications 
138 
 





139
 
Appendix
Function Parameter List





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
140
P001  The 1
st
 Acceleration Time 
The time to accelerate from 0.5 Hz to the maximum output frequency can be 
set.  
 
Data setting range (s)  0.04·0.1 to 3600 
Increment (s) 
0.1(0.1 to 999.9), 
1(1000 to 3600) 
・The display code for “0.04 s” is “0000”. 
・The maximum output frequency can be set with parameter P005 and P008. 
 
 
・Please note that if the acceleration time setting is too small, overcurrent may 
occur depending on the load.   
 
Related parameters: P005, P008 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
141
P002 
The 1
st
 Deceleration Time 
The time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0.5 Hz can be 
set.  
 
Data setting range (s)  0.04·0.1 to 3600 
Increment (s) 
0.1 (0.1 to 999.9), 
1 (1000 to 3600) 
・The display code for "0.04 s” is “0000”. 
・The maximum output frequency is set with parameter P005 and P008. 
 
 
・Please note that if the deceleration time setting is too small, overcurrent may 
occur depending on the load. 
 
Related parameters: P005, P008 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
142
P003 
Run Command Select 
Run/stop and forward/reverse run can be selected with operation panel, 
signal input from external control device or communication commands. 
 
Setting 
value 
Command 
status 
Panel 
reset 
function 
Operation method and control circuit terminal 
connection diagram 
0 
Panel  ○ 
Start: RUN, Stop: STOP 
Forward/reverse run: can be set in Rotation 
Direction Setting mode (dr mode) 
1 
Panel  ○ 
Forward run: UP+RUN, Reverse run: 
DOWN+RUN, Stop: STOP 
2 
External 
control 
× 
4 
External 
control 
○ 
 
Common terminal 
(Ternimal No. 1 or No. 8)
 
ON: Start/OFF: Stop 
ON: Reverse 
run/OFF: Forward run 
3 
External 
control 
× 
5 
External 
control 
○ 
 
Common terminal 
(Ternimal No. 1 or No. 8)
 
ON: Forward run/OFF: 
Stop 
ON: Reverse 
run/OFF: Stop 
6 
Communication  × 
7 
Communication  ○ 
Make run command transmitted through 
communication valid. 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
143 
■  3-wire run/stop command 
Please assign “3-wire stop command” to any input terminal of SW1 to SW5. 
The following connection example indicates the situation that “3-wire stop 
command” is assigned to input terminal SW1. 
 
Setting  
value 
Command 
status 
Panel reset 
function 
Operation method and control circuit terminal 
connection diagram 
2 
External 
control 
× 
4 
External 
control 
○ 
 
Common terminal 
(Ternimal No. 1 or No. 8)   
ON: Start 
ON: Reverse run/OFF: 
Forward run 
ON: Stop (*1) 
3 
External 
control 
× 
5 
External 
control 
○ 
 
Common terminal 
(Ternimal No. 1 or No. 8) 
ON: Forward run 
ON: Reverse run 
ON: Stop (*1) 
(*1) If any terminal of SW1 to SW5 (control circuit terminal No. 4 to No. 8) is 
used as “3-wire stop command”, please set “P036 to P040: SW1 to SW5 
Function Select” to “10” (3-wire stop command). In addition, please note 
that even if “P041: Input Logic Setting” is set to “a contact input”, “b 
contact input” will still apply. 
 
■  Panel reset function 
When a fault trip occurs, reset cannot be made with stop signal input from 
external devices. Therefore, use STOP SW on the panel to reset the fault trip. 
But if the reset lock function is used, it will take precedence. In addition, reset 
fuction is also valid. 
 
 
・If forward run and reverse run signal are turned ON simultaneously, the 
operation status will not be changed. If the inverter is stopped and both 
signals are turned ON simultaneously, the operation will not start. 
 
Related parameters: P036 to P040 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
144 
P004 
Frequency Setting Signal 
The frequency setting signal can be selected with operation panel, signal 
input from external devices or communication command. 
 
Setting 
value 
Command 
status 
Details of signal 
setting  
Operation method and control circuit terminal 
connection diagram 
0 
Potentiometer 
setting 
Potentiometer on the panel 
MAX: maximum frequency (refer to P005 and 
P008) 
MIN: minimum frequency (or 0 V stop) 
OP trip will occur if the operation panel is 
removed during operation. 
1 
Panel 
Digital setting  Can be set in “Frequency Setting Mode (Fr)” 
2 
Potentiometer 
Terminal No.13, 14 and 15 (center of 
potentiometer is connected to No.14) 
3 
0 to 5 V 
(Voltage signal) 
Terminal No.14 and 15 (14: +, 15: -) 
4 
0 to 10 V 
(Voltage signal) 
Terminal No. 14 and 15 (14: +, 15: -) 
5 
4 to 20 mA 
(Current signal) 
Terminal No.14 and 15 (14: +, 15: -): a 200 Ω 
resistor is connected between 14 and 15. 
6 
External  
Control 
0 to 20 mA 
(Current signal) 
Terminal No.14 and 15 (14: +, 15: -): a 200 Ω 
resistor is connected between 14 and 15. 
7 
Communication 
RS485 
communication 
Make frequency command transmitted through 
communication valid. 
8 
Panel 
Potentiometer 
setting 
Potentiometer on the operation panel 
MAX: maximum frequency (refer to P005 and 
P008) 
MIN: minimum frequency (or 0 V stop) 
*Operation will continue even if the panel is 
removed during operation. 
 
 
・If a 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA signal is used, please connect a “200 Ω 
resistor” between terminal No.14 and 15. 
(If the 200 Ω resistor is not connected, the inverter could be damaged.) 
・When frequency setting signal is set to a value other than “1” or “7”, the 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
145 
inverter will run or stop as defined by the setting value of “P101: 0 V Stop 
Function Select”. If 0 V stop function is set to invalid, parameter P101 should 
be set to “0000”. 
 
Related paremeters: P005, P008, P101 to P104 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
146 
■  Operation when P004 is set to “8” 
·The basic operation is the same as the operation when P004 is set to “0”, but 
the operation will continue instead of triggering OP trip even if the operation 
panel is removed. 
·The value prior to operation panel removal is used as frequency setting. 
·The following operation procedures must be performed when frequency is 
changed with the potentiometer after the operation panel is reinstalled. 
1) Press MODE button to switch to “Frequency Setting Mode (Fr)”. 
2) Press SET button. 
As th
e frequency data flickers, it can be 
changed with the potentiometer. 
3) Press SET button to change frequency data with the potentiometer. 
After the changed frequency data is applied, acceleration or deceleration 
operation will start with new setting value. Thus the frequency can be changed 
with the potentiometer. 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
147 
P005 
V/F Mode 
 
V/F mode of “50· 60 Hz” and “0.5 to 400 Hz” can be set separately within the 
maximum output frequency band (50 to 400 Hz).   
Setting   
value 
Name  Details 
50
50 Hz mode 
V/F mode of 50 Hz is set regardless of parameter P008 and P009 
setting. 
60
60 Hz mode 
V/F mode of 60 Hz is set regardless of parameter P008 and P009 
setting. 
FF
V/F mode can be set in parameter P008 and P009. P008: 
maximum output frequency setting, P009: base frequency setting
3C
3-point V/F mode can be set in parameter P008 to P013. 
P008: maximum output frequency setting, P009: base frequency 
setting 
P010: change point frequency 1 setting, P011: change point 
voltage 1 setting; 
P012: change point frequency 2 setting, P013: change point 
voltage 2 setting 
 
3C1 Set value of fixed mode with P009 to P013.
3C2
Set value of fixed mode with P009 to P013.
3C3 
Set value of fixed mode with P009 to P013.
3C4
Set value of fixed mode with P009 to P013.
3C5
Set value of fixed mode with P009 to P013.
3C6
Set value of fixed mode with P009 to P013.
Free mode 
3-point mode 
3-point fixed mode1
3-point fixed mode2
3-point fixed mode3
3-point fixed mode4
3-point fixed mode5
3-point fixed mode6





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
148 
 
 
 
If 3-point V/F mode is used, please set each parameter according to the 
following relation diagram. 
(Also apply to the 2
nd
 characteristic) 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
149 
 
 
· Factory settings of maximum output frequency and base frequency are both 
50 Hz. 
· Settings for 3C1 to 3C6 don't affect the second feature.
· Please consider the setting of Upper Frequency Limit (parameter P100) 
when changing the maximum output frequency. 
· In free mode or 3-point mode, please note that sharp 
acceleration/deceleration or overcurrent may occur depending on setting 
values and load state if change point frequency and voltage are changed 
during operation. 
·If change point frequency 1 or 2 is set to a value higher than base frequency, 
the invert will still  operate according to the base frequency s
etting.   
· If change point frequency 2 is set to a value lower than change point 
frequency 1, it w ill operate according to the setting of latter one.   
· If change point voltage 1 or 2 is set below the torque boost value, it will 
operate according to the setting value of “P007: Torque Boost”.   
· If change point voltage 2 is set to a value lower than change point voltage 1, 
it will  operate according to the setting of latter one. 
· In 3-point mode, V/F curve (P006) corresponds to constant torque mode. 
Even if the setting is square torque 
mode, constant torque mode still applies.
· It is invalid during vector control (P129 = “1”). 
Related parameters: P007 to P013, P100 
■ 3-point mode 1
■ 3-point mode 4
Output frequency(Hz)
Output frequency(Hz) Output frequency(Hz) Output frequency(Hz)
Output voltage(%)
Output voltage(%)
Output voltage(%)
Output voltage(%)
Output voltage(%)
Output voltage(%)
Output frequency(Hz) Output frequency(Hz)
■ 3-point mode 5 ■ 3-point mode 6
■ 3-point mode 2 ■ 3-point mode 3





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
150 
P006 
V/F Curve 
Constant or square torque mode can be selected.   
 
Setting 
value 
Name  Remarks 
0 
Constant torque 
mode 
For machine 
applications, etc. 
1 
Square torque 
mode 
For fan and pump 
applications, etc. 
 
 
 
 
·If “P005: V/F Mode” is set to 3-point mode, 3C1 to 3C6,V/F curve will 
correspond to constant torque mode. 
Even if the setting is square torque mode, constant torque mode will still apply.   
·It is invalid during vector control (P129 = “1”). 
 
Related parameters: P005, P009 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
151
P007 
Torque Boost 
●  Torque boost level corresponding to load characteristics can be set. The 
larger the setting value is, the higher output voltage and torque boost will 
be.  
・After the mode is set to “auto torque boost”, the output voltage will change 
automatically according to the load fluctuation. To set “Auto torque boost”, 
please press T (down) button when the operation panel displays “0”. 
Name 
Data setting range 
(%) 
Auto torque boost  Auto 
Manual torque 
boost 
0 to 40% 
 
Method of increasing torque at lower speed 
・If higher torque is required at lower speed, the torque boost level can be set 
to a larger value, thus generating higher output voltage to increase the torque. 
 
 
・If the boost level setting is too high, it may cuase overcurrent fault, overload 
fault, motor overheating or excessive noise.   
・The motor current will rise after the boost level increases. Please carefully 
consider the settings for “P016: Electronic Thermal Select” and “P017: 
Thermal Current Setting”. 
・Once it is set to “vector control”, the settings for parameter “P129: Vector 
Control Select =1” and parameter “P007: Torque Boost” will become invalid. 
・During auto torque boost setting, parameter “P130: Motor Capacity”, “P131: 
Motor Pole Number” and “P133: Voltage Compensation Constant” must be set. 
The setting for “P133: Voltage Compensation Constant” can be tuned 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
152
automatically by “P132: Motor Constant Measuring Function”. 
・Overcurrent trip may occur if the value of voltage compensation constant is 
too large. 
・The torque may be insufficient at lower speed if the value of voltage 
compensation contant is too small. 
・The change from manual torqe boost to auto torque boost or vice versa 
cannot be made during operation. 
●Please use the inverter in the following conditions when set to “auto torque 
boost”. 
・The motor must be the squirrel-cage induction type for general purpose. 
・
 
Please select the inverter with capacity equivalent to or one level higher 
than motor capacity. 
Example 1) Please select a 0.75 kW inverter for motor ranging from 0.4 kW to 
0.75 kW. 
Example 2) Please select a 1.5 kW inverter for motor ranging from 0.75 kW to 
1.5 kW. 
・Number of motor poles must be “2”, “4” or “6”.   
・It must operate in standalone mode (i.e., one motor is driven by one 
inverter). 
・The maximum wiring length between the inverter and motor must not exceed 
30 m. 
If the above conditions are not satisfied, it is unlikely to achieve sound 
operation performance.   
・The output frequency for auto torque boost setting ranges from 1 Hz to 120 
Hz. 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
153
P008 
P009 
Max. Output Frequency 
Base Frequency 
Maximum output frequency and base frequency can be set.   
(Parameter P005 is valid only when “FF” or “3C” is set.) 
 
■  Parameter P008: Max. Output Frequency 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
50.0 to 400.0 
 
■  Parameter P009: Base Frequency 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
45.0 to 400.0 
 
 
・If “P005: V/F Mode” is set to “50” or “60”, the maximum output frequency and 
base frequency will become fixed values. 
・Frequency higher than “P100: Upper Frequency Limit” cannot be output. 
・If a general-purpose motor with rated frequency of 50/60 Hz is running at a 
frequency exceeding the ratings, the motor may be damaged. Therefore, 
please set a frequency that matches with motor characteristics. 
・If base frequency is required to be changed simutaneously with maximum 
output frequency for a dedicated high-speed motor etc., such change should 
be made with the parameter. 
・When running a general-purpose motor at a frequency higher than universal 
frequency, the base frequency setting should not exceed the rated output 
frequency (50/60 Hz) of the motor. 
・When a general-purpose motor reaches a level higher than the base 
frequency (normally 50/60 Hz), the motor will show constant output 
characteristics and the generated torque will drop in reverse proportion to the 
frequency. 
 
Related parameters: P005, P100 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
154 
P010  P012
P011 
Change Point Frequency 1
Change Point Voltage 1 
P013
Change Point Frequency 2
Change Point Voltage 2
 
Change point 1 and 2 can be selected in 3-point mode of “P005: V/F Mode”. 
(It is valid only when parameter P005 is set to “3C”.) 
■ 
Parameter P010: Change Point Frequency 1
 
Data setting 
range (Hz) 
0.5 to 400.0 
■ 
Parameter P011: Change Point Voltage 1
 
Data setting 
range (%) 
0 to 100 
■ 
Parameter P012: Change Point Frequency 2
 
Data setting 
range (Hz) 
0.5 to 400.0 
■ 
Parameter P013: Change Point Voltage 2
Data setting 
range (%) 
0 to 100 
 
·Read “P005: V/F Mode” carefully before setting. 
· Change point frequency 1 and 2 will operate according to the setting value 
of base frequency when set to a value higher than base frequency. 
·Change point frequency 2 will operate according to the the setting value of 
change  point  frequency  1  when  set  to  a  value  lower  than  change  point 
frequency 1. 
·When  setting  “P007:  Torque  Boost”,  change  point  voltage  1  and  2  will 
operate according to the setting value of torque boost if set to a value lower
 
than torque boost level. 
·Change  point  voltage  2  will  operate  according  to  the  the  setting  value  of 
change point voltage 1 when it is set to below change point voltage 1. 
·Please note that sharp acceleration/deceleration or overcurrent may occur 
depending  on  setting  values  and  load  status  if  data  is  changed  during 
·Set as "3C1" to "3C6" of "P005: V/F Mode", P010 to P013 will change to fixed 
value automatically, and can not be able to be changed.
operation. 
Related paremeters: P005, P100, P007 to P009 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
155
P014  Max. Output Voltage 
Maximum output voltage can be set.   
 
Data setting 
range (V) 
1 to 500 
*When the data is set to “0”, power   
voltage value will be output.   
 
 
 
・A voltage exceeding power supply rating cannot be output. 
・This setting has no connection with DC brake level. 
 
Related parameters: P005, P008 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
156
P015 
S-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration Mode 
The acceleration/deceleration mode can be switched between linear and 
S-shaped (quadratic and cubic) pattern. 
 
Setting value  Details 
0 
Linear acceleration/deceleration 
(Factory setting) 
1 
S-shaped 
acceleration/deceleration 
(Quadratic curve) 
2 
S-shaped 
acceleration/deceleration (Cubic 
curve) 
 
 
 
 
・
The acceleration/deceleration time remains the same regardless of the 
acceleration/deceleration mode (linear or s-shaped acceleration/deceleration). 
 
Related parameters: P001, P002, P061 to P066 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
157
P016 
P017 
Electronic Thermal Select 
Thermal Current Setting 
Electronic thermal operation level can be set when motor overload is detected 
and the inverter output needs to be stopped. 
Operation coasts to stop when OL is displayed. 
 
■  Parameter P016: Electronic Thermal Select   
Setting 
value 
Validity of 
function 
Details of function 
0 
× 
OL trip will occur if the inverter current remains 140% of its 
rating for 1 minute. 
1 
○  The output frequency is not derated 
2 
○  The output frequency is derated 
3 
○  Forced air-cooled motor specification 
*About frequency derating 
The function can automatically compensate operation level when motor 
cooling performance drops during low-speed operation. 
 
 
 
■  Parameter P017: Thermal Current Setting 
Data setting range (A)  0.1 to 100.0 
* Please make settings according to the rated current of the applicable motor. 
 
 
■  Example of setting current and thermal operation (P016=1) 
・Setting current  ×100%  ⇒  Does not operate 
・Setting current  ×125%  ⇒  Operate (OL trip) 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
158
P018 
Overcurrent Stall Prevention Function 
・Overcurrent stall prevention function: 
During acceleration/deceleration, if acceleration/deceleration time is too short 
for the inertial load and the output current exceeds OCS level, the parameter 
serves to extend acceleration/deceleration time. 
・Overcurrent trip prevention function: 
If overcurrent occurs in the inverter during operation, output will be 
temporarily stopped and started again when the current drops to normal level. 
 
Name 
Setting 
value 
Details 
0 
Overcurrent stall prevention function OFF 
Overcurrent trip prevention OFF 
1 
Overcurrent stall prevention function ON 
Overcurrent trip prevention ON 
2 
Overcurrent stall prevention function OFF 
Overcurrent trip prevention ON 
Overcurrent 
stall 
prevention 
function 
3 
Overcurrent stall prevention function ON 
Overcurrent trip prevention OFF 
 
 
・When load fluctuates drastically or the inverter accelerates or decelerates 
sharply, instantaneous overcurrent may sometimes lead to trip. 
・For 200 V/0.75 kW inverter, if the carrier frequency setting is higher than 7.5 
kHz, overcurrent trip prevention function will become invalid. 
・For 200 V/1.5 kW inverter, if the carrier frequency setting is higher than 5 
kHz, overcurrent trip prevention function will become invalid. 
・For 3.7 kW inverter, if the carrier frequency setting is higher than 10 kHz, 
overcurrent trip prevention function will become invalid.   
・The operation level of overcurrent stall prevention function can be set with 
parameter “P021: OCS Level”. The factory setting is 140% of rated current.
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
159
・Overcurrent trip prevention function is activated regardless of setting of 
parameter “P018: Overcurrent Stall Prevention Function” after parameter 
“P020: Current Limit Function” is set. 
 
Related parameter: P021 
 
P019  Overvoltage Stall Prevention Function 
During deceleration, when the deceleration time is too short for the inertial 
load, this parameter can be used to temporarily retard deleceration, thus 
preventing overvoltage trip. 
 
Setting value  Details 
0 
Stall prevention function disabled 
1 
Stall prevention function enabled 
 
 
・When regenerative brake is used in the inverter with braking function, please 
set the value to “0”. 
(The regenerative brake function will not operate since the factory setting is 
“1”). 
・The specifications of built-in brake of inverter are as follows. Please take 
them into full consideration before using.   
Please note that the braking resistor and inverter could be damaged if used   
beyond specifications. 
(1) Braking torque:100% 
(2) Maximum duty factor (%ED): 5% 
(3) Maximum working time: 5 s 
・Only brake circuit is built in the inverter. 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
160
P020 
Current Limit Function 
If the output current reaches the overcurrent stall level (OCS level) during 
overload operation, the frequency will be automatically reduced. When the 
load recovers to normal level, the frequency will be automatically restored to 
the original setting and the operation will continue. This function is effective for 
preventing overcurrent trips in sticky material crushing machines.   
When the function becomes valid/invalid and the output current reaches the 
overcurrent stall level, deceleration time will be automatically set to lower the 
frequency.  
The operation level (overcurrent stall level) can be set with the parameter 
“P021: OCS Level”. 
 
Data setting range (s)  00·0.1 to 9.9 
* “00” corresponds to a setting without current limit.   
 
 
・Overcurrent trip prevention function operates regardless of the setting of the 
parameter “P018: Overcurrent Stall Prevention Function” after the parameter 
“P020: Current Limit Function” is set. 
 
Related parameters: P018, P021 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
161
P021 
OCS Level 
The OCS level (overcurrent stall prevention operation level) and current limit 
function level can be set with a ratio (%) to the rated current of inverter. 
 
Data setting range (%)  1 to 200 
 
 
・The factory setting of OCS level is 140%  of rated current. 
・The OCS level is equivalent to current limit level.   
・It has no connection with electronic thermal level and overload detection 
level. 
 
Related parameters: P018, P020 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
162
P022 
P023 
Retry Function 
Retry Count 
The retry function can automatically reset the fault and restart (run) operation 
after waiting time has elapsed when an inverter fault trip occurs. Please use 
this function to continue the operation. 
 
 
 
When the retry function is used, the unit may 
automatically start (restart) suddenly, so do not 
approach the unit. (Please take measures to ensure 
personal safety.) 
Failure to do so may lead to injury. 
 
■  Parameter P022: Retry Function 
Setting value  Details 
0 
Retry function disabled (retry is not performed.) 
1 
Perform retry operation only for overcurrent fault and heat sink abnormal 
overheating (SC1/SC2/SC3/SC4/SC5/SC6/OC1/OC2/OC3). 
2 
Perform retry operation only for overvoltage fault (OU1/OU2/OU3). 
3 
Perform retry operation only for overcurrent fault and heat sink abnormal 
overheating (SC1/SC2/SC3/SC4/SC5/SC6/OC1/OC2/OC3) and 
overvoltage fault (OU1/OU2/OU3). 
 
■  Parameter P023: Retry count 
Data setting range (times)  1 to 10 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
163
 
・The retry interval is set with parameter “P026: Waiting Time”. 
・ Fault alarm is not output during retry operation. But when the fault still 
occurs even if retry is performed for preset times, the fault alarm will be 
output. 
・If an unselected fault occurs during retry, the fault alarm will be output and 
the retry count accumulated till present will be cleared. 
・Once the power is cut off, the retry count accumulated till now will be 
cleared. 
・If the fault does not occur for over 5 minutes, the retry times accumulated up 
to now will be cleared. 
・When speed search is selected with parameter “P165: Speed Search Select 
during Retry” and the time set with parameter “P026: Waiting Time” and “P163: 
Waiting Time to Speed Search” has elapsed, the speed search function will 
start to operate. 
■  Related parameter: P026 
 
P024  Start Mode 
This parameter is used to set the start-up operation for the case that a run 
signal set externally is input when the power is turned ON. 
 
 
Depending on the start mode setting, when the run 
signal is ON, the inverter may start (restart) suddenly if 
the power is turned ON or restored after a power failure. 
Therefore, do not approach the unit. Design the machine 
so that personal safety can be ensured even if the inverter 
starts suddenly. 
Depending on the start mode function setting, if the fault 
trip is reset with the run signal ON, the inverter may 
sometimes restart suddenly. (Please take measures to 
ensure personal safety.) 
Failure to do so may lead to injury. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
164
・The factory setting is "1" (OP stop). 
・If the value is set to “0”, operation will start immediately after the power is 
turned ON. 
・If the value is set to "2", operation will start when the power is turned ON and 
after the waiting time has elapsed.   
 
Setting  
value 
Operation  Details of operation 
0 
Run 
Operation starts immediately when the low voltage level (LU 
level) is exceeded after the power is turned ON. 
1 
“OP” stop 
OP trip occurs when the low voltage level (LU level) is 
exceeded after the power is turned ON. 
Turn the run signal OFF once, perform reset operation and 
turn the run signal ON again to start operation.   
2 
Run after 
waiting time 
elapses 
Operation starts when the low voltage level (LU level) is 
exceeded and the waiting time has elapsed after the power is 
turned ON.(The waiting time can be set with parameter P026.) 
3 
“OP stop” 
OP trip occurs when the low voltage level (LU level) is 
exceeded after the power is turned ON. 
Turn the run signal OFF once, perform reset operation and 
turn the run signal ON again to start operation.   
(The setting will function in the same manner as data "1" with 
run signal ON when the power is turned ON. However, 
starting after the waiting time has elapsed is possible during 
normal startup.) 
 
 
 
・Waiting time can be set with parameter P026. 
 
Related parameter: P026 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
165
P025  Ride-through Restart Select 
The restart pattern after constant power failture or instantaneous power 
supply can be selected according to the load status and system configuration.   
A waiting timer function is built-in. 
 
 
The inverter may suddenly start (restart) if the power is 
restored after a power failure with the setting of 
ride-through restart, so do not approach the unit. 
(Please take measures to ensure personal safety.) 
Failure to do so may result in injury.   
 
Inverter operation in regard to instantaneous power failure time 
Setting  
value 
≥ 15 ms 
(Note 1) 
>15 ms 
(Note 1) 
≤ 100 ms 
(Note 2) 
>100 ms 
(Note 2) 
0 
·LU trip occurs and the inverter operates according to the start 
mode setting. 
·”LU” will be displayed and the fault alarm signal will be output. 
1 
·Restart from 0 Hz after the waiting time 
has elapsed. 
·"LU" will be displayed, but the fault 
alarm signal will not be output. 
2 
·After the waiting time has elapsed, the 
inverter restarts at the frequency applied 
before the ride-through occurrence. 
·"LU" will be displayed, but the fault 
alarm signal will not be output. 
3 
Operation 
continues  
·After the waiting time has elapsed, the 
inverter will sense the motor rotation 
through speed search function and 
restart at the corresponding frequency. 
·”LU” will be displayed but the fault alarm 
signal will not be output. 
The inverter 
operates 
according to the 
start mode setting. 
(Note 1)  This is the minimum time for operation at the rated output current. 
(The time may be longer depending on different models.) 
(Note 2)  This is the minimum time. (The time may be longer with higher 
rated capacity.) Even if the power failure time is relatively long 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
166
(approx. 1 min.), the inverter may sometimes restart after the 
power is restored. Therefore, inverter, motor and load equipments 
should be restarted after the power is restored for more than 4 
minutes (waiting time + 2 minutes). 
 
 
 
 
 
・Waiting time can be set with parameter P026. 
 
Related parameter: P026 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
167
P026  Waiting Time 
Waiting time required by the start mode, the ride-through restart and retry 
function can be set.   
Data setting range (s)  0.1 to 100.0 
 
Related parameters: P022 to P025 
 
P027  Reverse Run Lock 
When used only in forward run mode, reverse run can be disabled to avoid 
possible mishandling.   
 
Setting value  Details 
0 
Reverse run operation enabled 
(Both forward run and reverse run 
operation enabled) 
1 
Reverse run disabled 
(Only forward run operation enabled) 
 
 
・When disabled, reverse run cannot be performed during the operation of 
panel, external control and communication. 
 
Related parameter: P004 
 
P028  Stop Mode 
Ramp-to-stop or coast-to-stop mode can be selected when stopping the 
inverter. 
 
Setting value  Mode  Details 
0 
Ramp-to-stop 
The inverter is stopped by the stop signal 
depending on the frequency decreased according 
to the deceleration time. 
1 
Coast-to-stop 
The inverter output is shut off immediately by the 
stop signal. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
168
P029 
Start Frequency 
The frequency at which the inverter output starts can be set during inverter 
start-up.  
 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
0.5 to 60.0 
 
 
・Please note that overcurrent may occur depending on setting values and 
load status if the data is changed during operation. 
 
P030  Stop Frequency 
The frequency at which the inverter output stops can be set when the inverter ramps 
to stop. 
 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
0.5 to 60.0 
 
Related parameters: P031 to P032 
 
Please note that overcurrent may occur depending on setting values and load status 
if the data is changed during operation. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
169
P031 
P032 
DC Brake Time 
DC Brake Level 
DC brake can be applied when the inverter output frequency drops below 
“P030: Stop Frequency” during ramp-to-stop. 
In addition, positioning control can be performed combining with JOG 
operation. 
 
■  Parameter P031: DC Brake Time   
Data setting range (s)  0000·0.1 to 120.0 
* The DC brake is not applied when "0000" is set. 
■  Parameter P032: DC Brake Level 
Data setting range (s)  0 to 100 
* The setting increment is “5”. The larger the   
value is, the stronger the braking force is. 
 
 
・The frequency for applying the DC brake is set by parameter “P030: Stop 
Frequency”. 
・DC brake during the switching between forward run and reverse run is set 
with parameter “P033: Stop Frequency during Forward/Reverse Run 
Operation”, “P034: DC Brake Time during Forward/Reverse Run Operation” 
and “P035: DC Brake Level during Forward/Reverse Run Operation”. 
 
Related parameter: P030 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
170
P033 
P034 
P035 
Stop Frequency during Forward/Reverse Run Operation 
DC Brake Time during Forward/Reverse Run Operation 
DC Brake Level during Rorward/Reverse Run Operation 
DC brake can be applied when the inverter output frequency drops below 
“P033: Stop Frequency during Forward/Reverse Run Operation” during 
forward/reverse run operation. 
 
■  Parameter P033: Stop Frequency during Forward/Reverse Run Operation 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
0.5 to 60.0 
 
■  Parameter P034: DC Brake Time during Forward/Reverse Run Operation 
Data setting range (s)  0000·0.1 to 120.0 
* DC brake will be not applied if “0000” is set. 
 
■  Parameter P035: DC Brake Level during Forward/Reverse Run Operation 
Data setting range (s)  0 to 100 
* The setting increment is “5”. The larger the value is, the stronger the braking 
force will be. 
 
 
・The frequency for applying DC brake is set with parameter “P033: Stop 
Frequency during Forward/Reverse Run Operation”. 
・“P033: Stop Frequency during Forward/Reverse Run Operation” is valid only 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
171
when DC brake is applied during forward/reverse run operation.(It's valid 
when P034 is set to a value other than “0000”.) 
・To stop the inverter, DC brake can be set with parameter “P030: Stop 
Frequency”, “P031: DC Brake Time” and “P032: DC Brake Level”.   





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
172
 
P036 
P037 
P038 
P039 
P040 
SW1 Function Select 
SW2 Function Select 
SW3 Function Select 
SW4 Function Select 
SW5 Function Select 
Control function of SW1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (control circuit terminal No. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) can 
be set.   
The SW to set 
the function 
SW1 
(terminal No.4)
SW2 
(terminal No.5)
SW3 
(terminal No.6) 
SW4 
(terminal No.7)
SW5 
(terminal No.8)
Parameter No.  P036 P037 P038 P039 P040 
 
0 
Multi-speed 
SW input 
Multi-speed 
SW input 
Multi-speed 
SW input 
Multi-speed 
SW input 
Multi-speed 
SW input 
1  Reset input  Reset input  Reset input  Reset input  Reset input 
2 
Reset lock 
input 
Reset lock 
input 
Reset lock 
input 
Reset lock 
input 
Reset lock 
input 
3 
JOG select 
input 
JOG select 
input 
JOG select 
input 
JOG select 
input 
JOG select 
input 
4 
External 
fault stop 
input 
External 
fault stop 
input 
External 
fault stop 
input 
External 
fault stop 
input 
External 
fault stop 
input 
5 
Parameter 
setting 
disable input 
Parameter 
setting 
disable input 
Parameter 
setting 
disable input 
Parameter 
setting 
disable input 
Parameter 
setting 
disable input 
6 
Coast-to-sto
p input 
Coast-to-sto
p input 
Coast-to-sto
p input 
Coast-to-sto
p input 
Coast-to-sto
p input 
7 
Frequency 
signal 
switch input 
Frequency 
signal 
switch input 
Frequency 
signal switch 
input 
Frequency 
signal 
switch input 
Frequency 
signal switch 
input 
8 
The 2
nd
 
characteristi
cs select 
input 
The 2
nd
 
characteristi
cs select 
input 
The 2
nd
 
characteristi
cs select 
input 
The 2
nd
 
characteristi
cs select 
input 
The 2
nd
 
characteristi
cs select 
input 
9 
PID control 
switch input 
PID control 
switch input 
PID control 
switch input 
PID control 
switch input 
PID control 
switch input 
Setting 
value 
10 
3-wire stop 
command 
3-wire stop 
command 
3-wire stop 
command 
3-wire stop 
command 
3-wire stop 
command 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
173 
11  —— 
Pulse 
counter 
input 
——
—— —— ——
  —— 
Frequency 
▲/▼ 
setting 
12 
Speed 
search 
Speed 
search 
Speed 
search 
Speed 
search 
Speed 
search 
Setting 
value 
13 
14 
Temporary 
stopping of 
winding 
mode   
Temporary 
stopping of 
winding 
mode   
Temporary 
stopping of 
winding 
mode   
Temporary 
stopping of 
winding 
mode   
Temporary 
stopping of 
winding 
mode   
Input mode
 of winding 
length
Claer winding 
length





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
174
■  Multi-speed SW Function 
SW function is set so that it is used as multi-speed function. 
Multi-speed function select is set with parameter P045. 
・When all SWs are set to multi-speed function and 16-speed operation is 
performed, the four SWs with lower No. are valid as multi-speed command 
SW. 
(Set “SW1 to SW5” to multi-speed function  →  Use SW1, SW2, SW3 and 
SW4 as multi-speed command.) 
・Read “P045: Multi Speed Function Select” carefully before using this function. 
(Refer to page 165) 
 
Related parameters: P045 to P086 
 
■ Reset Function 
Fault stop status can be reset through external control if an inverter fault trip 
(stop) occurs. 
When a fault trip occurs and SW signal input is turned ON, the fault trip status 
will be cleared if the SW signal input is turned OFF. 
 
 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
175
■  Reset Lock Function 
When a fault trip occurs, clearing of fault trip status with stop signal is disabled 
to perform reset operation with SW signal after identifying the details of fault 
trip and eliminating the abnormality.   
・Normally, SW signal is input with ON status. 
・When a fault trip occurs, the inverter will maintain the trip status even if stop 
signal and reset signal are input. 
・After the abnormality is identified and eliminated, the fault trip will be reset 
when this SW is turned OFF. 
 
 
 
* Turn reset lock signal OFF and press STOP button to reset the fault. 
In addition, turn the fault reset signal OFF. 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
176
■JOG Function 
Micro operations such as position adjustment can be performed with external 
control signals. 
Signal input terminals for controlling micro operation from external devices 
can be set with parameter P036 to P040. 
But Run Command Select (parameter P003) should be set through external 
control. 
・Turn the signal input ON, and it will enter JOG operation mode. 
・JOG operation is performed according to “P042: JOG Frequency”, “P043: 
JOG Acceleration Time” and “P044: JOG Deceleration Time” settings, after 
run/stop and forward/reverse run signals are input with terminal No.2 and 
No.3. 
 
< Example > When SW1 (parameter P036 = 3) is set to JOG function and run 
command select (parameter P003 = 2) is used 
 
Note 1) During JOG operation, please turn the JOG select signal ON (time B) 
and then turn the run signal ON. 
Note 2) During reverse run operation, please turn the reverse run signal ON 
(time A) and then turn the run signal ON. 
 
Related parameters: P042 to P044 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
177
■External Fault Stop Function   
Signal input terminal for applying fault stop (emergency stop) to the inverter 
through external devices can be set.   
・The inverter will stop output immediately after the external fault stop input 
(setting value = 4) turns SW signal ON and “AU” is displayed.   
・Input signal logic setting (contact A and B input select) can be set with “P041: 
Input Logic Setting”. 
 
< Example > When SW1 (parameter P036 = 4) is set to external fault stop, 
and input logic setting (P041 = 1) and run command select (parameter P003 = 
2) are used 
 
* When external fault stop signal is set to contact B input, fault reset can be 
applied after run signal is turn OFF, even if external stop signal is “ON”. But 
fault trip will occur after the run signal is turned “ON” again. So please turn the 
run signal “ON” after the external fault stop signal being turned “OFF” for 
normal operation. 
 
■  Parameter Setting Disable Function 
The signal input terminal for disabling the parameter setting through external 
control can be set.   
・After signal input is turned ON, setting parameters with the operation panel 
and communication are disabled. 
・When the signal input is turned ON, function parameters and built-in memory 
parameters cannot be set but be monitored. 
・During data setting, data cannot be changed even if SET button is pressed 
when the signal is ON. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
178
■ Coast-to-stop Function 
The signal input terminal for applying coast-to-stop through external control 
can be set.   
・During operation, the inverter will stop output immediately after signal input 
is turned ON and “0.0” is displayed.   
(without fault indication and fault alarm output) 
・The inverter will run immediately after signal input is turned OFF and run 
signal is turned ON.   
 
[Note] The inverter will start as the signal is turned OFF, so please ensure 
personal safety before operation.               
・The inverter will stop normally after the run signal is turned OFF together 
with signal input being turned OFF. 
 
< Example > When SW1 (parameter P036 = 6) is set to coast-to-stop and 
run command select (parameter P003 = 2) is used 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
179
■  Frequency Signal Switching Function 
Signal input terminal for switching frequency setting command from “The 1
st
 
Frequency Setting Signal (command set with parameter P004)” to “The 2
nd
 
Frequency Setting Signal (command set with parameter P125)” can be set.   
This function is valid when parameter “P124: The 2
nd
 Analog Input Function 
Select” is set to “0: The 2
nd
 Frequency Setting Signal”. 
・When signal input is OFF: The 1
st
 Frequency Setting Signal 
・When signal input is ON: The 2
nd
 Frequency Setting Signal 
 
< Example > When SW1 (parameter P036 = 7) is set to frequency switching 
 
 
Related parameters: P124 to P127 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
180
■ The 2
nd
 Characteristics Select Input 
When SW signal is ON, the inverter will run according to the 2
nd
 
Characteristics Function settings as follows. 
 
Switching button OFF  Switch button ON 
P001: The 1
st
 Acceleration Time  P061: The 2
nd
 Acceleration Time 
P002: The 1
st
 Deceleration Time    P062: The 2
nd
 Deceleration Time 
P009: Base Frequency  P116: The 2
nd
 Base Frequency 
P007: Torque Boost  P117: The 2
nd
 Torque Boost 
P016: Electronic Thermal Select 
P118: The 2
nd
 Electronic Thermal 
Select 
P017: Thermal Current Setting 
P119: The 2
nd
 Thermal Current 
Setting 
P010: Change Point Frequency 1 
P120: The 2
nd
 Change Point 
Frequency 1 
P011: Change Point Voltage 1 
P121: The 2
nd
 Change Point 
Voltage 1 
P012: Change Point Frequency 2 
P122: The 2
nd
 Change Point 
Frequency 2 
P013: Change Point Voltage 2 
P123: The 2
nd
 Change Point 
Voltage 2 
P130: Motor Capacity  P158: The 2
nd
 Motor Capacity 
P131: Motor Pole Number  P159: The 2
nd
 Motor Pole Number 
P133: Voltage Compensation 
Constant 
P160: The 2
nd
 Voltage 
Compensation Constant 
P134: Slip Compensation 
Frequency 
 
P161: The 2
nd
 Slip Compensation 
Frequency 
Note) Ensure personal safety before switching characteristics. 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
181
■PID Control Switching Function 
Signal input terminal for cancelling PID control through external control can 
be set. When the signal input is turned ON, the inverter switches from “PID 
control” to the the command set with parameter P004. 
The function is valid when parameter “P124: The 2
nd
 Analog Input Function 
Select” is set to “1 to 3”. 
・When the signal input is OFF: PID control or control based on auxillary 
frequency signal 
・When the signal input is ON: command set with parameter P004 
 
< Example > When SW1 (parameter P036 = 9) is set to frequency switching 
 
Related paremeters: P004, P124, P101 to P104 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
182
■  3-wire Stop Command Function 
Signal input terminal for executing 3-wire stop command can be set.   
When “3-wire stop signal” is ON, “run signal” or “forward/reverse run 
operation” can be held automatically. Also, switching to OFF will cancel the 
holding status.   
・Please set “Run Command Select” (parameter P003). 
・The input signal of 3-wire stop command is “contact B input”. 
(regardless of “P041: Input Logic Setting”) 
 
Related parameter: P003 
 
■  Pulse Counter Input Function 
The function can be set during multi-speed operation by inputting pulses 
(P045 = 5, 6). Pulse input signal is sent to SW2 (terminal No.5) and number of 
pulses is counted up. 
The function is valid when setting of “P045: Multi Speed Function Select” is “5” 
or “6”. 
Count the number of OFF→ON rising edges. 
・For details of pulse input during multi speed operation, read “P045: Multi 
Speed Function Select” carefully before using the function. (Refer to P.165) 
 
Related parameters: P001, P002, P045 to P052, P061 to P066, P079 to P086 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
183
■ Frequency S/T Setting Function 
When frequency and parameter P040 are set to “digital setting with operation 
panel (P004 = 1)” and “11” respectively, SW3 and SW4 can be used to change 
frequency while SW5 to save this frequency. 
・It is forced to be used as function input terminal of “SW3: frequency increase 
SW”, “SW4: frequency decrease SW” and “SW5: frequency memory SW” after 
parameter P040 is set to “11”. 
· SW3: During ON, frequency increases. (During OFF, the existing frequency 
is held.) 
· SW4: During ON, frequency decreases. (During OFF, existing frequency is 
held.) 
· SW5: Turn ON once and OFF again to save the frequency at that time.) 
(The frequency can be saved even if the power is turned OFF.) 
 
Note 1) The operating frequency will not be changed when both S button 
(SW3) and T button (SW4) are turned OFF or ON (i.e. in A or B area 
etc). 
Note 2) The operating frequency will not be saved when “frequency memory 
operation of SW5” and “frequency setting in frequency setting mode” 
on the operation panel are not performed. 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
184
 
・ON/OFF status of each SW can be set to “contact A input” or “contact B 
input” with parameter “P041: Input Logic Setting”. When using each SW 
function, please note the setting of parameter P041. 
・When parameter “P154: MOP Function Select” is set to “1”, the 
acceleration/deceleration time set with parameter “P155: 
Accelertion/Deceleration Time for MOP Operation” will be used. 
 
Related parameters: P004, P154, P155 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
185
■  Speed Search Function 
・The inverter will apply minor DC voltage to the motor, detect its rotation 
speed and restart it at this frequency when the motor rotates freely due to 
inertia, which is the so-called “speed search fuction”. 
・There are 3 methods to start speed search. 
1) Through input signal from control terminals (SW1 to SW5)   
Related parameters: P036 to P040 (SW1 to SW5 Function Select) 
2) During motor startup 
Related parameter: P162 (Speed Search Select during Startup) 
3) During retry operation of inverter after fault trip occurence 
Related parameters: P022 (Retry Function), P165 (Speed Search Select 
during Retry) 
・Perform speed search according to the following procedures. 
 
・Conditions of speed search can be set with parameter P163 to P168. 
 
 
・To start speed search with control input is only valid during free 
operation.Therefore, even if the control input assigned to speed search is ON, 
the speed search will nevertheless be ignored.  
・If the rotation speed is too low and the rotation direction does not match the 
rotation command, the rotation speed may not be sensed.   





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
186
・The sensing function may fail if the speed search is performed for the motor 
with capacity smaller than the inverter. 
・“CAL” will be displayed on the operation panel during speed search. During 
the displaying, there is minor DC voltage applied on the motor externally. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
187 
■  Winding Mode Control Function 
· Winding mode control fuction will operate at the triangular-wave-shaped frequency as 
shown in the following graph. 
· When parameter “P169: Coiling Mode Control Select” is set to “1” or “2”, winding mode 
control function will start after run comm and is turned ON. 
During startup, the inverter will keep on accelerating within the time set with parameter
 “P001: The 1
st
 Acceleration Time” until the set frequency is reached. 
· The conditions of winding mode control are set with parameter P169 to P173. 
· The operational mode of winding mode is set by parameter "P178:Winding Mode 
Operation Select". When parameter "P178" is set to "1" or "3", 2-point mode start. 
·When parameter “P036 to P040: SW1 to SW5 Function Select” is set to “13”, and SW 
input of corresponding control input terminals (SW1 to SW5) are ON, the inverter will 
terminate winding mode control and continue to run at the frequency when SW input 
(SW1 to SW5) is turned ON. 
· When stop command is turned ON, the deceleration will be performed to stop the 
inverter according to the value set with parameter “P002: The 1   Deceleration Time” 
st
regardless of operating frequency. 
 
 
Set frequency of second point by parameter "P046: second frequency", set stop length by 
parameter "P182: winding stop length", basic frequency will increase by the winding length 
and line feature will change, when winding length arrive stop length, will change to second 
frequency. When P178 is set to "2" or "3", random mode start, set random change range 
by parameter "P179: max random rise time radio" and "P180: minimum random rise time radio", 
and when P179<P180, random function doesn't start. Especially, when P178 is set to "3", 
it will be 2-point random mode, basic frequency will change from fixed frequency to second 
frequency by winding length. And, rise time radio change randomly in the random rage.





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
188 
 
If the following functions start together with winding mode control function, 
such function will take precedence. And what’s more, winding mode control 
will not start when the following functions operate. 
·Trial operation function 
·Automatic tuning function 
·Timer operation function 
·
·
·
PID function 
■ Winding mode input length
When set parameter "P169: Winding mode control select" to "1" or "2", set 
parameter "P036: SW1 function select" to "14", and pulse input in SW1, length 
can be calculated by "P181: Winding length magnification".
The calculate result will be displayed in n027.
Set “P038: SW3 function select” to “14”, the calculate value will be cleared.
Winding length =
(n 
× Winding length radio)
1000
Pulse input 
Pulse
Winding length zero clearing





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
189
P041  Input Logic Setting 
Input signals can be detected by selecting “A contact input” or “B contact 
input”. 
 
■ Setting value 
・Contact A input = “0” : When SW (button) signal is OFF (terminal level is “L”), 
ON will be detected. 
·Contact B input = “1”: When SW (switch) signal is ON (terminal level is “H”), 
ON will be detected. 
■ Setting method 
・Convert bit 0 to 4 to DEC format for input. 
・Input the sum of setting value×addition value into the setting data. 
 
< Operation Example > When SW1 and SW2 are “B contact input” and the 
other signals are “A contact input” 
Setting value = (0
×16) + (0×8 ) + (0×4) + (1×2) + (1×1) = 3 
 
Terminal 
name 
Without 
setting 
SW5  SW4  SW3  SW2  SW1 
Terminal 
No. 
- 
⑧  ⑦  ⑥  ⑤  ④ 
Bit 
5 to 15  4  3  2  1  0 
Setting 
value 
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 
Addition 
value 
- 16 8 4 2 1 
 
 
・Due to the fact that ON/OFF status of each SW will change with the input 
logic setting, so check the input logic setting before using. 
・Forward/reverse run and run/stop are fixed to “contact A input”. 
・ When each SW function is set to “3-wire stop command function”, “contact 
B input” always applies even if “Input Logic Setting” is set to “contact A input”. 
 
Related parameters: P036 to P040 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
190
P042 
P043 
P044 
JOG Frequency 
JOG Acceleration Time 
JOG Deceleration Time
 
Operating frequency and acceleration/deceleration time during JOG operation 
can be set.   
■  Parameter P042: JOG Frequency 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
0.5 to 400.0 
 
■  Parameter P043: JOG Acceleration Time 
Data setting range (s)  0.04· 0.1 to 3600 
Increment (s)  0.1 (0.1 to 999.9), 1 (1000 to 3600)
·The display code for 0.04 s is “0000”. 
 
■  Parameter P044: JOG Deceleration Time 
Data setting range (s)  0.04· 0.1 to 3600 
Increment (s)  0.1 (0.1 to 999.9), 1 (1000 to 3600)
·The display code for 0.04 s is “0000”. 
 
 
·“Run command select” must be set to external control. (Parameter P003 can 
be set to “2~5”.) 
·“SW function select” must be set to “JOG function”. 
·When SW set to JOG function is turned ON, the inverter will enter JOG 
operation ready status. 
·Perform JOG run/stop and forward/reverse run with terminal No.2 and No.3. 
·Refer to function descriptions on page 172. 
·JOG frequency under vector control is 1 Hz to 120 Hz. 
 
Related parameters: P003, P036 to P040 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
191
P045  Multi-speed Function Select 
When SW1 to SW5 (control circuit terminal No.4 to No.8) are set as multi 
speed function with parameter P036 to P040 and SW2 (control circuit terminal 
No.5) is set as pulse counter input function with parameter P037, each control 
function can be set through the parameter. 
 
Setting value  Details 
0 
Set to “multi-speed frequency operation” 
1 
Set to “2
nd
/3
rd
/4
th
 acceleration/deceleration operation” 
2 
Set to “acceleration/deceleration linked with multi-speed 
frequency operation” 
3 
Set to “multi-speed frequency operation using timer” 
4 
Set to “acceleration/deceleration linked with multi-speed 
frequency operation using timer” 
5 
Set to “multi-speed frequency operation using pulse input” 
6 
Set to “acceleration/deceleration linked with multi-speed 
frequency operation using pulse input” 
 
When setting value is “0” to “2”, set SW1 to SW5 (control circuit terminal No.4 to 
No.8) to “multi-speed function” (setting value = “0”) with parameter P036 to P040. 
When setting value is “3” to”4”, SW1 to SW5 (control circuit terminal No.4 to 
No.8) are invalid even if they are set to “multi speed function” with parameter 
P036 to P040. 
When setting value is “5” to “6”, set SW2 (control circuit terminal No.5) to 
“pulse counter input function” (i.e. setting value “11”) with parameter P037.   
 
Multi-speed frequency operation (setting value = “0”) 
The 2
nd
/3
rd
/4
th
 acceleration/deceleration operation (setting value = “1”) 
Acceleration/deceleration linked with multi-speed frequency operation 
(setting value = “2”) 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
192
■  Setting value = “1”: multi-speed frequency operation 
Up to 16 steps can be set by SW in multi-speed frequency operation. 
Acceleration/deceleration time is fixed to “the 1
st
 Acceleration/Deceleration 
Time” (parameter P001, P002). 
When functions of SW1 to SW5 are all set to “0” (multi-speed SW input 
function), 4 SWs (starting from the one with the smallest No.) can be valid as 
multi-speed command SW.     
The 2
nd
 to 16
th
 speed frequency are set with parameter P046 to P060. 
■  Setting value = “2”: The 2
nd
/3
rd
 /4
th
 acceleration/deceleration operation 
When the frequency is fixed to the 1
st
 speed, up to 4 acceleration/deceleration 
times can be changed through SW.   
The 2
nd
 to 4
th
 acceleration/deceleration time can be set with parameter P061 
to P066. 
■  Setting value = “3”: acceleration/deceleration linked with multi-speed 
frequency operation 
4 SWs can be used to link up to 16 speed steps and 4 acceleration/ 
deceleration times to perform multi-speed frequency operation. 
 
Multi-speed frequency 
operation 
The 2
nd
/3
rd
/4
th
 
acceleration/ 
deceleration function 
Acceleration/ 
deceleration linked with 
multi-speed frequency 
operation 
P045 = 0  P045 = 1  P045 = 2 
SW1 
(Note 
1) 
SW2 
(Note 
1) 
SW3 
(Note 
1) 
SW4 
(Note 
1) 
Frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration 
time 
Frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration 
time 
Frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration 
time 
OFF OFF OFF OFF 
The 1
st
 
speed 
The 1
st
 
acceleration/
deceleration
The 1
st
 
speed 
The 1
st
 
acceleration

/

deceleration
ON OFF OFF OFF 
The 2
nd
 
speed 
The 2
nd
 
acceleration/
deceleration
The 2
nd
 
speed 
The 2
nd
 
acceleration

/

deceleration
OFF ON OFF OFF 
The 3
rd
 
speed 
The 3
rd 
acceleration/
deceleration
The 3
rd
 
speed 
The 3
rd 
acceleration

/

deceleration
ON ON OFF OFF 
The 4
th
 
speed 
The 1
st
 
acceleration/
deceleration
The 1
st
 
speed 
The 4
th 
acceleration/
deceleration
The 4
th
 
speed 
The 4
th 
acceleration

/

deceleration





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
193
Multi-speed frequency 
operation 
The 2
nd
/3
rd
/4
th
 
acceleration/ 
deceleration function 
Acceleration/ 
deceleration linked with 
multi-speed frequency 
operation 
P045 = 0  P045 = 1  P045 = 2 
SW1 
(Note 
1) 
SW2 
(Note 
1) 
SW3 
(Note 
1) 
SW4 
(Note 
1) 
Frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration 
time 
Frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration 
time 
Frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration 
time 
OFF OFF  ON  OFF 
The 5
th
 
speed 
The 5
th
 
speed 
ON OFF ON OFF 
The 6
th
 
speed 
The 6
th
 
speed 
OFF ON  ON OFF 
The 7
th
 
speed 
The 7
th
 
speed 
ON ON ON OFF 
The 8
th
 
speed 
The 8
th
 
speed 
OFF OFF OFF  ON 
The 9
th
 
speed 
The 9
th
 
speed 
ON OFF OFF ON 
The 10
th
 
speed 
The 10
th
 
speed 
OFF ON OFF ON 
The 11
th
 
speed 
The 11
th
 
speed 
ON  ON OFF ON 
The 12
th
 
speed 
The 12
th
 
speed 
OFF OFF  ON  ON 
The 13
th
 
speed 
The 13
th
 
speed 
ON OFF ON  ON 
The 14
th
 
speed 
The 14
th
 
speed 
OFF ON  ON  ON 
The 15
th
 
speed 
The 15
th
 
speed 
ON ON ON ON 
The 16
th
 
speed 
The 1
st
 
acceleration/
deceleration
The 1
st
 
speed 
The 1
st
 
acceleration/
deceleration
The 16
th
 
speed 
The 1
st
 
acceleration

/

deceleration
  (Note 1) When the functions of any 4 of SW1 to SW5 are set to “0” (multi-speed SW input 
function), the four SWs (starting from the one with the smallest No.) can be valid as 
multi-speed command SW.   
< Example > When SW1, SW2, SW4 and SW5 are set to multi-speed SW input 
function, SW4 and SW5 will be allocated to the column (see Table above) previously 
occupied by SW3 and SW4. 
 
 
 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
194
■  Setting value = “1”: Example of multi-speed frequency operation function 
Up to sixteen levels of frequency can be selected, switched and controlled by 
4 button signals. 
(The 1
st
 speed: setting signal of P004, the 2
nd
 to 16
th
 speed: setting frequency 
of P046 to P060) 
・Set any 4 buttons of SW1 to SW5 to multi-speed function buttons. 
(When setting of P036 to P040 is “0”) 
・With this function, 1 button, 2 buttons and 3 buttons are used to input 2-step 
speed, 4-step speed and 8-step speed respectively. 
・The inverter will stop (0 V stop) when the 2
nd
 to 16
th
 speed frequency (P046 
to P060) are set to “0000” and this multi-speed frequency is selected. 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
195
■Setting value = “2”: Example of the 2
nd
, 3
rd
 and 4
th
 acceleration/deceleration 
operation function 
Four groups of acceleration/deceleration times can be selected, switched and 
controlled with two SW signals. 
(The 1
st
 acceleration/deceleration time: P001 and P002, the 2
nd
 to 4
th
 
acceleration/deceleration time: P061 to P066) 
 
・Set any two buttons of SW1 to SW5 to multi-speed function buttons. (When 
setting of P036 to P040 is “0”) 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
196
■  Setting value = “3”: Example of acceleration/deceleration linked with 
multi-speed frequency operation 
The 2
nd
, 3
rd
 and 4
th
 speed can be linked (combined) with the 2
nd
, 3
rd
 and 4
th
 
acceleration/deceleration by using two SW signals. 
 
・Set any 2 buttons of SW1 to SW5 to multi-speed function buttons.(When 
setting of P036 to P040 is “0”) 
 
 
 
・The 1
st
 speed is command value of frequency setting signal set with 
parameter P004. 
・The 1
st
 acceleration time is set with parameter P001. 
The 1
st
 deceleration time is set with parameter P002. 
・The 2
nd
 to 16
th
 speed frequency can be set with parameter P046 to P060. 
The 2
nd
 to 4
th
 acceleration/deceleration time is set with parameter P061 to 
P066. 
 
Related parameters: P036 to P041, P046 to P066 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
197
Multi-speed frequency operation by timer (setting value = “3”) 
Acceleration/deceleration linked with multi-speed frequency operation by 
timer (setting value = “4”) 
■  Setting value = “3”: multi-speed frequency operation by timer 
During multi-speed frequency operation using timer, the 
acceleration/deceleration time can be fixed to 8 steps. When the run 
command is input, the inverter will automatically switch to the next speed after 
operating within the setting time. 
When SW1 to SW5 are set to “multi-speed SW input function”, even if signals 
are input during timer multi-speed operation using timer, such signals will be 
invalid and the operation will continue. 
Rotation direction and continuous operation times of timer during one cycle 
can be set with parameter “P067: Rotation Direction of Timer Operation” and 
“P068: Continuous Operation Times of Timer” respectively. Operation mode 
and waiting time for timer operation from the end of one cycle to the next one 
can be set with parameter “P069: Continuous Operation Mode of Timer” and 
“P070: Continuous Waiting Time of Timer Operation”. Runtime for the 1
st
 to 8
th
 
speed can be set with parameter “P071 to P078: The 1
st
 to 8
th
 Speed 
Runtime”. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
198
■  Setting value = “4”: aceleration/deceleration linked with multi-speed 
frequency operation using timer 
Up to 8 steps of speeds and 4 acceleration/deceleration times can be linked to 
perform mullt-speed operation using timer.   
Multi-speed frequency operation by timer 
Aceleration/deceleration linked with   
multi-speed frequency operation by timer 
P045 = 3  P045 = 4 
Rotation 
direction 
(selected 
bit) 
Frequency  Runtime
Acceleration/
deceleration 
time 
Rotation 
direction 
(selected 
bit) 
Frequency Runtime
Acceleration/
deceleration 
time 
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 1
st
 
speed 
① 
The 1
st
 
speed 
runtime 
T1 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 1
st
 
speed 
① 
The 1
st
 
speed 
runtime 
T1 
The 1
st
 
acceleration/
deceleration 
time A1/D1 
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 2
nd
 
speed 
② 
The 2
nd
 
speed 
runtime 
T2 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 2
nd
 
speed 
② 
The 2
nd
 
speed 
runtime 
T2 
The 2
nd
 
acceleration/
deceleration 
time A2/D2 
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 3
rd
 
speed 
③ 
The 3
rd
 
speed 
runtime 
T3 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 3
rd
 
speed 
③ 
The 3
rd
 
speed 
runtime 
T3 
The 3
rd
 
acceleration/
deceleration 
time A3/D3 
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 4
th
 
speed 
④ 
The 4
 th
 
speed 
runtime 
T4 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 4
th
 
speed 
④ 
The 4
th
 
speed 
runtime 
T4 
The 4
th
 
acceleration/
deceleration 
time A4/D4 
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 5
th
 
speed 
⑤ 
The 5
 th
 
speed 
runtime 
T5 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 5
th
 
speed 
⑤ 
The 5th 
speed 
runtime 
T5 
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 6
th
 
speed 
⑥ 
The 6
th
 
speed 
runtime 
T6 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 6
th
 
speed 
⑥ 
The 6
th
 
speed 
runtime 
T6 
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 7
th
 
speed 
⑦ 
The 7
th
 
speed 
runtime 
T7 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 7
th
 
speed 
⑦ 
The 7
th
 
speed 
runtime 
T7 
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 8
th
 
speed 
⑧ 
The 8
th
 
speed 
runtime 
T8 
The 1
st
  
acceleration 
time A1 
The 1
st
  
deceleration 
time D1 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 8
th
 
speed 
⑧ 
The 8
th
 
speed 
runtime 
T8 
The 1
st
 
acceleration/
deceleratio

n

time A1/D1





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
199
■  Example: mode for one cycle of timer operation 
 
 
After the timer runs one cycle for times set with parameter “P068: Continuous 
Operation Times of Timer”, “tEnd” will be displayed. Then the timer will return 
to “0000” (operation status mode) after stop command is input with “tEnd” 
displayed. 
 
 
 
・During timer operation, forward/reverse run commands input from operation 
panel, external control and communication are invalid. 
・During timer operation, operation will be stopped immediately even in cycle 
operation when the stop command is input. 
 
Related parameters: P001, P002, P036 to P041, P046 to P052, P061 to P078 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
200
Multi-speed frequency operation using pulse input (setting value = “5”) 
Acceleration/deceleration linked with multi-speed frequency operation using 
pulse input (setting value = “6”) 
■  Setting value = “5”: multi-speed frequency operation using pulse input 
The acceleration/deceleration time can be fixed to 8 steps at most by using 
SW2 to input pulses to perform multi-speed frequency operation. The speed 
will automatically switch to the next step after run command and the set pulse 
are input. 
Please set “P037: SW2 Function Select” to “11”. Detect the number of OFF→
ON rising edges.Rotation direction and continuous operation times of timer 
during one cycle can be set with parameter “P067: Rotation Direction of Timer 
Operation” and “P068: Continuous Operation Timers of Operation” 
respectively. Operation mode and waiting time for timer operation from the 
end of one cycle to the next one can be set with parameter “P069: Continuous 
Mode of Timer Operation” and “P070: Continuous Waiting Time of Timer 
Operation”. Times of pulse input for the 1
st
 to 8
th
 speed can be set with 
parameter “P079 to P086: The 1
st
 to 8
th
 Pulse Input Times”. 
 
■  Setting value = “6”: acceleration/deceleration linked with multi-speed 
frequency operation using pulse input 
Up to eight speed steps and four acceleration/deceleration times can be set by 
using SW2 to input pulses to perform multi-speed frequency operation.   
Please set “P037: SW2 Function Select” to “11”. Detect the number of OFF→
ON rising edges. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
201
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
202
Multi-speed frequency operation using pulse 
input 
Acceleration/deceleration linked with 
multi-speed frequency operation using pulse 
input 
P045 = 5  P045 = 6 
Rotation 
direction 
(selected 
bit) 
Frequency  Runtime 
Acceleratio
n/ 
deceleratio
n time 
Rotation 
direction 
(selected 
bit) 
Frequency Runtime 
Acceleration
/ 
deceleration 
time 
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 1
st
 
speed 
① 
The 1
st
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N1 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 1
st
 
speed 
① 
The 1
st
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N1 
The 1
st
 
acceleration/
deceleration 
time A1/D1
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 2
nd
 
speed 
② 
The 2
nd
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N2 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 2
nd
 
speed 
② 
The 2
nd
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N2 
The 2
nd
 
acceleration/
deceleration 
time A2/D2
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 3
rd
 
speed 
③ 
The 3
rd
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N3 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 3
rd
 
speed 
③ 
The 3
rd
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N3 
The 3
rd
 
acceleration/
deceleration 
time A3/D3
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 4
th
 
speed 
④ 
The 4
th
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N4 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 4
th
 
speed 
④ 
The 4
th
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N4 
The 4
th
 
acceleration/
deceleration 
time A4/D4
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 5
th
 
speed 
⑤ 
The 5
th
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N5 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 5
th
 
speed 
⑤ 
The 5
th
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N5 
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 6
th
 
speed 
⑥ 
The 6
th
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N6 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 6
th
 
speed 
⑥ 
The 6
th
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N6 
Forward/ 
reverse run 
0/1 
The 7
th
 
speed 
⑦ 
The 7
th
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N7 
Forward/ 
reverse run
0/1 
The 7
th
 
speed 
⑦ 
The 7
th
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N7 
Forward/re
verse run 
0/1 
The 8
th
 
speed 
⑧ 
The 8
th
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N8 
The 1
st
 
acceleratio
n time A1
The 1
st
 
deceleratio
n time D1
Forward/re
verse run
0/1 
The 8
th
 
speed 
⑧ 
The 8
th
 
speed 
pulse input 
times N8 
The 1
st
 
acceleration/
deceleration 
time A1/D1





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
203 
■  Example: Mode for one cycle of pulse input operation 
 
* Setting value of “P069: Continuous Operation Mode of Timer” is “0”. 
Setting value of “P067: Rotation Direction of Timer Operation” is “14”. 
 
After the timer runs one cycle for times set with parameter “P068: Continuous 
Operation Times of Timer”, “tEnd” will be displayed. Then the timer will return 
to “0000” (operation status mode) after stop command is input with “tEnd” 
displayed. 
 
 
· During pulse input operation, forward/reverse run commands input from 
operation panel, external control and communication are invalid. 
·During pulse input operation, the operation will be stopped immediately even 
in cycle operation when the stop command is input. 
 
Related parameters: P001, P002, P036 to P041, P046 to P052, P061 to P070, 
P079 to P086 
 
Setting value





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
204
P046 
P051 P056
P047  P052 P057
P048  P053 P058
P049  P054 P059
P050 
The 2
nd
 Speed Frequency
The 3
rd
 Speed Frequency 
The 4
th
 Speed Frequency 
The 5
th
 Speed Frequency 
The 6
th
 Speed Frequency
P055
The 7
th
 Speed Frequency 
The 8
th
 Speed Frequency 
The 9
th
 Speed Frequency 
The 10
th
Speed Frequency
The 11
th
 Speed Frequency
 
P060
The 12
th
 Speed Frequency 
The 13
th
 Speed Frequency 
The 14
th
 Speed Frequency 
The 15
th
 Speed Frequency 
The 16
th
 Speed Frequency
 
The 2
nd
 to 16
th
 speed frequency can be set to perform multi-speed operation.   
 
Data setting range (Hz)  0000·0.5 to 400.0 
・“0000” indicates 0 V stop. 
・When under vector control, the frequency is 1 Hz to 120 Hz. 
 
Related parameters: P036 to P041, P045, P061 to P086 
 
P061  P063 P065
P062 
The 2
nd
 Acceleration Time 
The 2
nd
 Deceleration Time
P064
The 3
rd
 Acceleration Time 
The 3
rd
 Deceleration Time
 
P066
The 4
th
 Acceleration Time 
The 4
th
 Deceleration Time
The 2
nd
 to 4
th
 acceleration/deceleration time can be set to perform 4-step 
acceleration/deceleration contol operation. 
The 2
nd
 to 4
th
 acceleration/deceleration time corresponds to the frequency 
band of 0.5 Hz to the max. output frequency. 
 
Data setting range (s)  0.1 to 3600 
Increment (s) 
0.1 (0.1 to 999.9), 
1 (1000 to 3600) 
 
Related parameters: P036 to P041, P045 to P048, P067 to P086 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
205
P067 
Rotation Direction of Timer Operation 
Rotation direction at each level from the 1
st
 to 8
th
 speed can be set in “P045: 
Multi Speed Function Select” when setting value is “3 to 6”.   
“0” and “1” indicate forward run and reverse run respectively, while the 1
st
 to 8
th
 
speed indicate different levels. After rotatation direction is determined (“0” 
(forward run) or “1” (reverse run)), the sum of 0 or 1 multiplied by addition 
value corresponding to each level can be acquired and used as setting value.   
  (Refer to the following table. The sum of rotation direction (“0” or “1”) 
multiplied by addition value of each speed level is used as setting value.) 
 
■  Example of setting: The 1
st
 speed = forward run, the 2
nd
 speed = forward 
run, the 3
rd
 speed = forward run, the 4
th
 speed = forward run 
The 5
th
 speed = reverse run, the 6
th
 speed = reverse run, the 7
th
 speed = 
reverse run, the 8
th
 speed = forward run 
 
Speed 
The 1
st
 
speed 
The 2
nd
 
speed 
The 3
rd
 
speed 
The 4
th
 
speed 
The 5
th
 
speed 
The 6
th
 
speed 
The 7
th
 
speed 
The 8
th
 
speed 
Rotation 
direction 
Forwar
d run 
Forwar
d run 
Forwar
d run 
Forwa
rd run 
Rever
se run 
Rever
se run 
Revers
e run 
Forwa
rd run 
Set 
value 
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 
Addition 
value 
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 
 
(0
×
1)
+
(0
×
2)
+
(0
×
4)
+
(0
×
8)
+
(1
×
16)
+
(1
×
32)
+
(1
×
64)
+
(0
×
128)=112 
So the setting value is “112”. 
 
 
・This function is valid only when the setting is “3” to “6” in “P045: Multi Speed 
Function Select”. 
・Please note that rotation direction varies depending on the setting. 
 
Related parameters: P001, P002, P045 to P052, P061 to P066 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
206
P068 
Continuous Operation Times of Timer 
Continuous operation times of timer in one cycle can be set by using the 1
st
 to 
8
th
 speed operation as “timer operation cycle” when the setting is “3” to “6” in 
“P045: Multi Speed Function Select”. 
 
Data setting range 
(times) 
0000·1 to 9999 
* “0000” indicates that there is no limit to operation times. After run command 
is input, the operation will keep on until stop command is input. 
 
 
・This function is valid only when the setting is “3” to “6” in “P045: Multi-Speed 
Function Select”. 
・If data is changed during operation, the data will become valid only after the 
next cycle arrives.   
 
Related parameters: P045, P069 to P070 
 
P069 
P070 
Continuous Operation Mode of Timer 
Continuous Waiting Time of Timer Operation 
Operation mode and continuous waiting time of timer operation from the end 
of the 1
st
 cycle to the 2
nd
 cycle can be set when the setting is “3” to “6” in 
“P045: Multi Speed Function Select”. 
If continuous operation mode of timer is set to “1”, continuous waiting time of 
timer operation will become invalid. 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
207
■  Parameter P069: Continuous Operation Mode of Timer 
Setting value  Details 
0 
After one cycle of operation, the operation returns to the 0 V stop 
status within the 1
st
 deceleration time and enters the next cycle.  
1 
After one cycle of operation, the operating frequency will change to 
the 1
st
 speed frequency of the next cycle within the 1
st
 deceleration 
time.  
 
■  Parameter P070: Continuous Waiting Time of Timer Operation 
Data setting range (s)  0000·0.1 to 6553 
Increment (s) 
0.1 (0.1 to 999.9), 
1 (1000 to 6553) 
* “0000” indicates that there is no waiting time.   
 
 
 
 
·If data is changed during operation, the data will become valid only after the 
next cycle arrives. 
・If data is changed during waiting time, the data will become valid only after 
the next cycle arrives. 
 
Related parameters: P002, P045 to P052, P061 to P068 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
208
P071 
P075
P072  P076
P073  P077
P074 
The 1
st
 Speed Runtime 
The 2
nd
 Speed Runtime 
The 3
rd
 Speed Runtime 
The 4
th
 Speed Runtime 
P078
The 5
th
 Speed Runtime 
The 6
th
 Speed Runtime 
The 7
th
 Speed Runtime 
The 8
th
 Speed Runtime 
Runtime at the 1
st
 to 8
th
 speed frequency can be set when the setting is “3” or 
“4” in “P045: Multi Speed Function Select”. 
 
Data setting range (s)  0000·0.1 to 6553 
Increment (s) 
0.1(0.1 to 999.9), 
1(1000 to 3600) 
* “0000” indicates that no operation will be performed at the set speed.  
 
 
・Each function is valid only when the setting is “3” to “4” in “P045: Multi Speed 
Function Select”. 
・The inverter will not operate at the set speed when the setting is “0000”. 
Multi-speed operation using timer will be performed only at the speed for which 
time is set with P071 to P078. 
If data is changed during operation, the data will become valid only after the 
next cycle arrives. 
 
Related parameters: P045 to P052, P061 to P070 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
209
P079  P083
P080 
P084
P081 
P085
P082 
The 1
st
 Speed Pulse Input Times 
The 2
nd
 Speed Pulse Input Times
The 3
rd
 Speed Pulse Input Times 
The 4
th
 Speed Pulse Input Times
P086
The 5
th
 Speed Pulse Input Time

s

The 6
th
 Speed Pulse Input Time

s

The 7
th
 Speed Pulse Input Time

s

The 8
th
 Speed Pulse Input Time

s

Pulse input times at the 1
st
 to 8
th
 speed frequency can be set when the setting 
is “5” or “6” in “P045: Multi-Speed Function Select”. 
 
Data setting range 
(times) 
0000·0.1 to 65530 
Increment (times) 
Indication “0.1” = “1 time” 
(Indication: 0.1 to 999.9) 
Indication “1” = “10 times” 
(Indication: 1000 to 6553) 
* “0000” indicates that no operation will be performed at the set speed.  
 
 
・Each function is valid only when the setting is “5” to “6” in “P045: Multi Speed 
Function Select”. 
・The inverter will not operate at the set speed when the setting is “0000”. 
Multi-speed operation using pulse input will be performed only at the speed for 
which time is set with P079 to P086. 
If data is changed during operation, the data will become valid only after the next 
cycle arrives. 
 
Related parameters: P045 to P052, P061 to P070 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
210
*When PWM/Pulse Input frequency signal is 
selected, functions of SW4 (terminal No.7) 
and SW5 (terminal No.8) will be used by PWM 
or pulse control exclusively. 
P087 
PWM/Pulse Input Frequency Signal Select 
PWM/Pulse Input signal from PLC etc. can be used to control the operating frequency. 
(However, the allowable PWM signal cycle ranges from 0.9 ms to 1100 ms.) 
 
Setting value  Details 
0 
PWM frequency signal 
select disabled 
1 
2
PWM frequency signal 
■  Connection and function descriptions of control circuit terminals 
 
■  The relationship between PWM signal and frequency command value 
 
· If parameter P005 is set to “50” or “60”, the maximum output frequency will 
be “50 Hz” or “60 Hz” respectively; if set to “FF” or “3C”, the maximum output 
frequency w ill be the value of parameter P 008. 
 
· The allowable PWM signal  cycle r anges from 0.9 ms to 1100 ms. 
· When P087 = 1, the settings of “P039: SW4 Function Select” and “P040: 
SW5 Function Select” are invalid. 
 
Related parameters: P005, P008, P088, P089 
Pulse input 
frequency signal
■ The relationship between pulse signal and frequency
Please set pulse input value per second when the output frequency is max in 
parameter "P174: pulse input signal frequency".        
When set parameter P005 to “50” or “60”, the max output frequency is “50Hz” · 
or “60Hz”, and when the value is “FF” or “3C”, the max output frequency is the 
value of parameter P008.
PWM signal
Pulse signal
PWM/Pulse
PWM/Pulse input 
frequency signal





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
211
P088  PWM Signal Average Times 
The inverter measures and calculates ON time and OFF time of each PWM 
cycle used as frequency command. 
When using this parameter, the times of each PWM cycle command should 
be averaged, and then the average operation times are set as final output 
frequency. 
 
Data setting range 
(times) 
1 to 100 
* If average times are increased, the frequency command will become stable, 
but the response speed will decrease.   
 
Related parameters: P087, P089 
 
P089  PWM Signal Cycle 
PWM signal cycle can be input with this parameter.   
Data can be set within  ±12.5% of the input PWM signal cycle. 
 
Data setting range 
(ms) 
1 to 2000 
 
 
·The output frequency controlled by PWM signal is “0 V stop or the minimum 
frequency (without ON status)” and “the maximum frequency (without OFF 
status)”. 
・Due to the fact that the output frequency accuracy relative to input signal will 
decrease around the minimum frequency and maximum frequency, do not 
use the inverter for precise frequency control. 
・The 2
nd
 frequency setting signal is prior to PWM frequency signal when the 
2
nd
 frequency setting signal is selected (ON). 
・PID control function is invalid when PWM frequency signal is selected. 
PWM frequency signal cannot be used as PID setting value (SP). 
 
Related parameters: P087, P088 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
212
P090 
P091 
Output TR1 Function Select 
Output TR2 Function Select 
Functions of open-collector output 1 (control circuit terminal No.10 to No.12) 
and open-collector output 2 (control circuit terminal No.11 to No.12) can be 
set.  
  TR1P090  TR2P091 Function 
ON conditions for open-collector 
output 
0 0 
Run signal 
With run signal ON or during inverter 
output 
1 1 
Reverse run 
signal 
When inverter is in reverse run status 
2 2 
Arrival signal 
When output frequency is within  ±2 
Hz of setting frequency 
3 3 
Overload alarm 
When the output current is above 
140% of the rated current or the 
electronic thermal level is reached. 
4 4 
Frequency 
sensing 
When the output frequency is above 
sensing frequency (parameter P093 
setting). 
5 5 
Current sensing 
(1) 
When the output current is above the 
sensing current level (parameter 
P095 setting). 
6 6 
Current sensing 
(2) 
When the output current is below the 
sensing current level (parameter 
P095 setting). 
7 7 
Fault alarm (1)  When fault trip occurs in the inverter 
8 8 
Fault alarm (2) 
When the inverter is in normal status 
(OFF for fault trip status) 
9 9 
After one cycle of 
timer operation 
When one cycle of timer operation 
completes (output is available only 
during waiting time) 
10 10 
Timer operation 
completed 
When timer operation completes   
(with “tEnd” displayed) 
Setting 
value 
11 11 
Alarm 
Output is available with alarm LED 
flickering. 
    
  
    
  
    
  





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
213
    
  
12 12 
Speed search 
operation signal 
When speed search starts, the 
open-collector output is ON; when 
the speed search completes, the 
open-collector output is OFF. 
Setting 
value 
13 - 
Output status 
signal 
PWM signals in proportion to output 
frequency or output current will be 
output.  
 
・The setting value “5” and “6” are used to set delay time of current detection 
signal with “P096: Current Sensing Delay Time”. 
・The setting value “10” is used to output the time set with “P070: Continuous 
Waiting Time of Timer Operation”.   
・Output frequency ratio or output current ratio of setting value “13” can be set 
with parameter P097. Setting value “13” can only be used to set 
open-collector output 1 (TR1). 
 
Related parameters: P070, P093, P095 to P097 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
214
P092  Output RY Function Select 
Functions of relay output (control circuit terminal A, B and C) can be set.   
・Energizing in ON status: The relay is turned ON when the coil is energized. 
(Signal ON status = ON between terminals A and 
C, OFF between terminals B and C) 
・Non-energizing in ON status: the relay is turned ON when the coil is not 
energized. 
(Signal ON status = OFF between terminals A 
and C, ON between terminals B and C) 
Setting value 
Energizing 
in ON 
status 
Non-energizing 
in ON status   
Function  ON conditions for relay 
0 
r0 Run signal 
With run signal ON or during 
inverter output 
1 
r1  Reverse run signal 
When inverter is in reverse run 
status 
2 
r2 Arrival signal 
When output frequency is within 
±2 Hz of setting frequency 
3 
r3 Overload alarm 
When the output current is above 
140% of the rated current or the 
electronic thermal level is 
reached. 
4 
r4 Frequency sensing 
When the output frequency is 
above sensing frequency 
(parameter P094 setting). 
5 
r5  Current sensing (1) 
When the output current is above 
the sensing current level 
(parameter P095 setting). 
6 
r6  Current sensing (2) 
When the output current is below 
the sensing current level 
(parameter P095 setting). 
7 
r7  Fault alarm (1) 
During fault trip occurrence in the 
inverter. 
8 
r8  Fault alarm (2) 
When the inverter is in normal 
status (OFF for fault trip status). 
 
    





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
215
 
    
9 
r9 
After one cycle of 
timer operation 
When one cycle of timer 
operation completes (output is 
available only during waiting 
time). 
10 
r10 
Timer operation 
completed 
When timer operation completes 
(with “tEnd” displayed). 
11 
r11 Alarm 
Output is available with alarm 
LED flickering. 
12 
r12 
Speed search 
operation signal 
When speed search starts, the 
open-collector output is ON; 
when the speed search 
completes, the open-collector 
output is OFF. 
 
・The setting value “5” and “6” are used to set delay time of current detection 
signal with “P096: Current Sensing Delay Time”. 
・The setting value “10” is used to output the time set with “P070: Continuous 
Waiting Time of Timer Operation”.   
 
Related parameters: P070, P094 to P096





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
216
P093 
P094 
Sensing Frequency[Output TR] 
Sensing Frequency[Output RY] 
Open-collector 1, 2 and relay output can be used to set the frequency sensed 
when outputting frequency sensing signals.   
 
■  Parameter P093: Sensing Frequency [Output TR] 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
0000·0.5 to 400.0 
・It is valid in open-collector output 1 and 2. 
・“0000” indicates 0 V stop (0.0). 
 
■  Parameter P094: Sensing Frequency [Output RY] 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
0000·0.5 to 400.0 
・“0000” indicates 0 V stop (0.0). 
 
■  The relationship between output frequency and each output signal 
 
 
Related parameters: P090 to P092 
 
 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
217
P095 
P096 
Current Sensing Level 
Current Sensing Delay Time 
Open-collector 1, 2 and relay output can be used to set current sensing level 
and delay time when current sensing signal is output.   
 
■  Parameter P095: Current Sensing Level 
Data setting range (A)  0.1 to 100.0 
 
■  Parameter P096: Current Sensing Delay Time 
Data setting range (s)  0.1 to 10.0 
・Current sensing delay time refers to the delay time for a signal to switch from 
OFF to ON. 
The delay time for a signal to switch from ON to OFF is about 100 ms (fixed 
value). 
 
Related parameters: P090 to P092 
 
P097  Analog and PWM Output Function Select 
Functions of “0 to 10 V voltage signal” and “output state signal (PWM)” output 
from control circuit terminal No.17 and terminal No.10 to No.12 can be set 
respectively. 
 
Setting 
value 
Details 
0 
Signals in proportion to output 
frequency are output. 
1 
Signals in proportion to output 
current are output.   





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
218 
■  The relationship between 0 to 10 V voltage signal and output 
frequency/output current 
 
■  The relationship between PWM output signal and output frequency/output 
current 
 
■  Precautions on 0 to 10 V voltage output and output status signal (PWM) 
·Such output signal is not for precise measurement purpose, so use it just as 
reference value. 
(Please use other measuring devices for the condition that needs accurate 
signal.) 
·Please note that the large signal value may be output when the signal in 
proportion to the output current is below 40% of rated current. 
(For example, certain level of signal will still be output even if there is no 
output current. H
owever, “0” level will be output if the invert
er is stopped.) 
 
 
·To acquire “PWM output” with terminal No.10 to No.12, set “P090: Output 
TR1 Function Select” to “13”. 
 
Related parameters: P090, P098 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
219
P098 
Analog and PWM Output Voltage Compensation 
“0 to 10 V voltage signal” and “output status signal (PWM)” can be compensated. 
 
Data setting range (%)  25 to 100 (increment = 1%) 
 
■  Adjustment range (full-scale) 
・Analog output voltage signal:3.75 to 10 (V) 
・PWM signal  :56.3 to 75 (%) 
 
Related parameters: P090, P097 
 
P099 
P100 
Lower Frequency Limit 
Upper Frequency Limit 
Upper limit and lower limit of output frequency can be set.   
 
■
  Parameter P099: Lower Frequency Limit 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
0.5 to 400.0 
 
■  Parameter P100: Upper Frequency Limit 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
0.5 to 400.0 
 
 
・When the upper frequency limit is lower than the maximum output frequency 
(parameter P008), the upper frequency takes precedence. 
・When the lower frequency limit is higher than the upper frequency limit 
(reverse run setting), the latter takes precedence. 
・The inverter may accelerate/decelerate depending on settings when data is 
changed during operation. 
 
Related parameters: P005, P008 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
220
P101 
0 V Stop Function Select 
When the frequency setting signal is lower than than setting value, the 
inverter output can be stopped by using 0 V stop function. 
 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
0000·0.5 to 400.0 
・Setting value “0000”  :0 V stop function disabled 
・Setting value “0.5 to 400.0”  :0 V stop function enabled (0 V stop frequency 
setting) 
 
■  0 V stop function 
・When the frequency signal is set to “analog setting (parameter P004 = “0”, 
“2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6” and “8”), the inverter will stop output after the frequency 
setting signal reaches the setting value of 0 V stop function select. 
・0 V stop will not be performed if 0 V stop function select is set to “0000”. 
The inverter will continuously run at the lower frequency limit if the frequency 
setting signal is lower than 1/100 (1%) of full scale. 
 
 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
221
 
・When frequency setting signal is set with digitial or communication method, 
the inverter will not perform 0 V stop. 
・If frequency setting signal is lower than 1/100 (1%) of full scale, the 
command value will become 0 Hz. 
 
Related parameters: P004, P099, P125 
 
P102 
P103 
P104 
Bias/Gain Function Select 
Bias Frequency Setting 
Gain Frequency Setting 
The relationship between output frequency and frequency setting signal 
(frequency setting analog signal of control circuit terminal No.14 or 
potentiometer) can be adjusted freely. Please use this function according to 
the applications. 
 
■  Parameter P102: Bias/Gain Function Select 
Setting 
value 
Details 
0 
Without bias/gain function 
1 
With bias/gain function 
 
■  Parameter P103: Bias Frequency Setting 
Data setting range (%)  -99.0 to 250.0 
 
■  Parameter P104: Gain Frequency Setting 
Data setting range (%)  0.0 to 500.0 
 
・Bias frequency and gain frequency are set with the ratio (%) of 100% 
maximum output frequency (parameter P008). 
・The frequency exceeding the maximum frequency or the upper frequency 
limit will not be output. 
Also, the frequency will not drop below the lower frequency limit. 
・ The inverter will not perform reverse run operation even if negative 
frequency setting signal is input. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
222
■  When bias frequency is set to “positive”  ■  When bias frequency is set 
to “negative” 
 
 
Related parameters: P004, P005, P008 
 
P105  Analog Input Filter 
Filter constant of analog input terminal (control circuit terminal No.14 and 
No.16) can be set to eliminate external interference caused by external 
voltage or current frequency setting signals. 
 
Data setting range 
(times) 
5 to 200 (Increment = 1) 
 
·Filter constants of analog input signals for control circuit terminal No.14 and 
No.17 share the same setting value.   
・Frequency command will become stable with the setting value increased, but 
response speed will decrease. 
 
Related parameters: P004, P125 
 
 
 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
223
P106  PID Control Mode 
With this function, the inverter can be used to control processes such as flow, air 
volume or pressure. 
 
 
 
When the automatic tuning through PID control starts, 
the inverter will automatically drive the motor within the 
range of uppter/lower frequency limit. Therefore, do not 
approach the unit. 
Failure to do so may result in injury.   
“PID operation mode select” and “switch setting for automatic tuning function” 
can be performed. 
 
Setting value  PID operation mode 
Automatic tuning 
function 
0 
Negative operation 
1 
Derivative-precedence type 
Positive operation 
2 
Negative operation 
3 
Proportional-derivative 
precedence type 
Positive operation 
× 
A0 Negative operation 
A1 
Derivative-precedence type 
Positive operation 
A2 Negative operation 
A3 
Proportional-derivative 
precedence type 
Positive operation 
○ 
 
■  PID operation mode select 
・Either “derivative-precedence type” or “proportional-derivative precedence 
type” PID control can be selected. 
Derivative precedence type PID control: generally speaking, when the setting 
value (SP) is changed, output 
variation will increase and 
convergence will speed up. 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
224
Proportional-derivative precedence type PID control: generally speaking, 
when the setting value 
(SP) is changed, output 
variation will decrease 
and convergence will 
slow down. 
·Upward/downward direction (negative operation/positive operation) of the 
output can be selected when the process changes. 
Negative operation: the output is increased with the measured value (PV) 
decreased.(For example: heating air) 
Positive operation: the output is increased with the measured value (PV) 
increased.(For example: cooling air) 
 
■ 
Automatic tuning function 
·Through automatic tuning, the inverter will calculate the optimum values of 
proportional gain (Kp), integral time (Ti) and derivative time (Td) required by 
PID control, and set the speculated results to parameters automatically. 
The switch setting for automatic tuning function can be set with setting data “A0” 
to “A3”. 
Refer to operation procedures of automatic tuning on page 250. 
 
 
·Before performing automatic tuning, allowable ranges of the motor and 
machine must be confirmed.   
 
Related parameters: P107 to P111, P124 to P127, P157 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
225 
P107 
P108 
P109 
P110 
P111 
Proportional Gain [Kp] 
Integral Time [Ti] 
Derivative Time [Td] 
Control Cycle [Ts] 
PID Target Value 
Proportional gain, integral time, derivative time, control cycle and PID target 
value required in PID control can be set.   
・Parameter P107 to P109 are used to set coefficients for PID control. 
・Parameter P110 is used to set PID control cycle. 
・When P004 = “1” or “7”, setting value (SP) can be set with parameter P111. 
 
■  Parameter P107: Proportional Gain [Kp] 
Data setting range  0.1 to 1000 
 
■  Parameter P108: Integral Time [Ti] 
Data setting range (s)  0000·0.1 to 3600 
* “0000” indicates there is no integral control. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
226 
■  Parameter P109: Derivative Time [Td] 
Data setting range (s)  0000·0.1 to 3600 
* “0000” indicates that there is no derivative control. 
 
■  Parameter P110: Control Cycle [Ts] 
Data setting range (s)  0.01 to 60.00 
 
■  Parameter P111: PID Target Value 
Data setting range (%)  0.0·0.1 to 100.0 
 
Related parameters: P004, P036 to P040, P099, P102 to P104, P124 to P127 
 
■  Setting procedures of PID control 
1. PID control select 
・“P124: The 2
nd
 Analog Input Function Select” is set to “1” or “2”. 
“1” and “2” will be treated as “measured value” and “bias signal” 
respectively. 
・When parameter P142 = “0” or “3”, PID control will not be performed. 
 
2. Measured value (PV) 
・“P125: The 2
nd
 Analog Input Signal Select” 
is set to the signal specification of the 
detector. 
・The relationship between detector signal 
and measured value (PV) is set with “P126: 
The 2
nd
 Bias Frequency Setting” and “P127: 
The 2
nd
 Gain Frequency”. 
<Example> 4 mA = 0%, 20 mA = 100% 
・Bias can be added with “P157: The 2
nd
 
Analog Superimposed Value”. 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
227 
3. Setting value (SP)   
・Setting signal of setting value (SP) is set with 
parameter P004 (Frequency Setting Signal). 
(Note) When Parameter P004 = “1” or “7”, 
setting value (SP) is set with parameter P111 
(PID Targert Value). 
・The relationship between setting signal and 
setting value (SP) is set with parameter P102 
to P104 (Bias/Gain Function Select, Bias 
Frequency and Gain Frequency Setting). 
<Example> 0 V = 0%, 5 V = 100% 
 
4. PID operation mode select 
・PID operation mode is selected with parameter P106 (PID Control Mode). 
 
5. Proportional gain (Kp), integral time (Ti), derivative time (Td) and control 
cycle (Ts) settings 
・Coefficients (Kp, Ti and Td) used in PID control are set with parameter 
P107 to P109. 
* Automatic tuning function can be used to adjust coefficients (Kp, Ti and 
Td) and change setting values. 
・PID control cycle (Ts) is set with parameter P110. 
*The lower/upper limit of output frequency is set with parameter P099 and 
P100. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
228 
■  Operation procedure of automatic tuning 
1. Switch to automatic tuning function 
Select “A0 to A3” with “P106: PID Control Mode” and press 
  button to set the data. 
 
2. Enter measurement ready status 
Press 
  button to enter measurement ready status. 
3. Automatic tuning starts 
Turn run command ON, and automatic tuning will start. 
(The displaying part will flicker.) 
*The inverter will drive the motor automatically. 
4. Automatic tuning completes 
When automatic tuning completes, “End” will be displayed 
after measured data are written to parameter P107 to 
P109 automatically, indicating that automatic tuning is 
complete.  
After that, data of parameter P106 will be automatically 
changed to PID operation mode without automatic tuning 
function. 
(When performed with “A0”, “A1” and “A2”, the data will be 
changed to “0”, “1” and “2” respectively.) 
5. Enter operation ready status (normal stop status) 
Turn stop command ON and enter operation ready status. 
After that, normal operation can be performed. 
*PID control status can be monitored in control state monitor (n14 to n17). 
 
 
・Depending on different processes, automatic tuning may not be performed. 
In this case, automatic tuning will stop with “Err” displayed and setting value of 
each parameter will remain unchanged. “Err” can be reset after stop 
command is turned ON to switch to normal stop status. 
・After multi-speed signal is input, PID control will be terminated to perform 
multi-speed operation.   
・After JOG signal is input, PID control will not be performed. 
・After PWM signal is selected, PID control will not be performed. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
229 
P112 
P113 
P114 
P115 
The 1
st
 Skip Frequency 
The 2
nd
 Skip Frequency 
The 3
rd
 Skip Frequency 
Skip Frequency Band Width 
If mechanical parts of the load resonate at a specific output frequency of 
inverter, continuous operation within frequency band should be avoided by 
setting the skip frequency and the skip frequency band. 
・Up to 3 skip frequency values can be set, and the skip frequency band can 
be set between 1 and 10 Hz. 
 
■  Parameter P112: The 1
st
 Skip Frequency 
■  Parameter P113: The 2
nd
 Skip Frequency 
■  Parameter P114: The 3
rd
 Skip Frequency 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
0000·0.5 to 400.0 
* “0000” indicates that there is no skip frequency setting. 
 
■  Parameter P115: Skip Frequency Band Width 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
0·1 to 10 
* “0” indicates that there is no skip function setting. 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
230 
P116 
The 2
nd
 Base Frequency 
The 2
nd
 base frequency can be selected and set with the 2
nd
 characteristics 
select button. 
(It is valid only when parameter P005 is set to “FF” or “3C”.) 
 
■  Parameter P116: The 2
nd
 Base Frequency 
Data setting range 
(Hz) 
45.0 to 400.0 
 
・The maximum output frequency can be 
set by parameter P005 (V/F Mode) or 
parameter P008 (Max. Output 
Frequency). 
 
 
・If “P005: V/F Mode” is set to “50” or “60”, the maximum output frequency and 
base frequency will be fixed values. 
・A frequency value exceeding “P100: Upper Frequency Limit” cannot be 
output. 
・If a general-purpose motor with rated frequency of 50/60 Hz is running at a 
frequency value exceeding the ratings, the motor may be damaged.Therefore, 
please set the frequency to match motor characteristics. 
・If the base frequency is required to be changed together with the maximum 
output frequency for a dedicated high-speed motor etc., such change can also 
be changed with the parameter. 
・When running the general-purpose motor at a frequency value exceeding 
the universal frequency, please set the base frequency to the rated output 
frequency (50/60 Hz) of general-purpose motor. 
・When the general-purpose motor reaches a level exceeding the base 
frequency (normally 50/60 Hz), the motor will have the constant output 
characteristics and the generated torque will drop in reverse proportion to the 
frequency. 
 
Related parameters: P005, P008, P036 to P040, P100, P117, P120 to P123 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
231 
P117 
The 2
nd
 Torque Boost 
The 2
nd
 torque boost can be selected and set with the 2
nd
 characteristics select 
button. The larger the setting value is, the higher output voltage and torque 
boost are. 
・After the mode is set to “auto torque boost”, the output voltage will be 
changed automatically according to the load fluctuation. To set “Auto torque 
boost”, please press T (down) button with the operation panel displaying “0”. 
Name 
Data setting 
range (%) 
Auto torque 
boost 
Auto 
Manual 
torque boost 
0 to 40% 
 
 
 
・If the boost level setting is too high, overcurrent fault, overload fault, motor 
overheating or excessive noise may occur.   
・The motor current will rise after the boost level is increased. Please carefully 
consider the settings of “P118: The 2
nd
 Electronic Thermal Select” and “P119: 
The 2
nd
 Thermal Current Setting”. 
・It is invalid under vector control (P129 = “1”). 
・During auto torque boost setting, parameter “P158: The 2
nd
 Motor Capacity”, 
“P159: The 2
nd
 Motor Pole Number” and “P160: The 2
nd
 Voltage Compensation 
Constant” must be set, or automatic tuning can be performed by using 
parameter “P132: Motor Constant Measuring Function”.
 
・Overcurrent trip may occur if the voltage compensation constant is too high. 
・The torque may be insufficient at lower speed if the voltage compensation 
contant is too low. 
・The change from manual torqe boost to auto torque boost or vice versa 
cannot be made during operation. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
232 
●Please use the inverter in the following conditions when set to “auto torque 
boost”. 
・The motor must be the squirrel-cage induction motor for general purpose. 
・Please select the inverter with the capacity equivalent to or 1 level higher 
than motor capacity.   
Example 1) Please select a 0.75 kW inverter for motor ranging from 0.4 kW 
to 0.75 kW. 
Example 2) Please select a 1.5 kW inverter for motor ranging from 0.75 kW 
to 1.5 kW. 
・The motor must be a 2-pole, 4-pole or 6-pole one.   
・It must be operated under standalone mode (i.e., one motor is driven by 
one inverter).   
・The maximum wiring length between the inverter and motor must not 
exceed 30 m. 
If the above conditions are not satisfied, sound operation performance cannot 
be achieved. 
When vector control is selected, the output frequency ranges from 1 Hz to 120 
Hz. 
・During auto torque boost setting, the output frequency ranges from 1 Hz to 
120 Hz. 
 
Related parameters: P005, P008, P036 to P040, P116, P118 to P123 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
233 
P118 
P119 
The 2
nd
 Electronic Thermal Select 
The 2
nd
 Thermal Current Setting 
Electronic thermal operation level can be selected and set with the 2
nd
 
characteristics select button when the inverter output is stopped. Operation 
coasts to stop when OL is displayed. 
 
■  Example for setting current and thermal operation (P016 = 1) 
・Setting current  ×100%  ⇒  Does not operate 
・Setting current  ×125%  ⇒  Operate (OL trip) 
 
■  Parameter P118: The 2
nd
 Electronic Thermal Select 
Setting 
value 
Validity of 
function 
Details of function 
0 
× 
OL trip will occur if current up to 140% of inverter’s rating 
continues for 1 minute.   
1 
○  Without output frequency derating 
2 
○  With output frequency derating 
3 
○  Forced air-cooled motor specification 
*About frequency derating 
Cooling performance of the motor will be reduced at lower speed. To handle 
the problem, this function can automatically compensate operation level.   
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
234
■  Parameter P119 = 1  ■  Parameter P119 = 2  ■  Parameter P119 = 3 
     
■  Parameter P119: The 2
nd
 Thermal Current Setting 
Data setting range (A)  0.1 to 100.0 
* Please make settings according to the rated current of the applicable motor. 
 
Related parameters: P036 to P040 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
235 
P120 
P122
P121 
The 2
nd
 Change Point Frequency 1
The 2
nd 
Change Point Voltage 1
 
P123
The 2
nd
 Change Point Frequency 2
The 2
nd 
Change Point Voltage 2
 
Change point 1 and 2 can be selected in 3-point mode of “P005: V/F Mode”. 
(It is valid only when parameter P005 is set to “3C”.) 
 
■  Parameter P120: The 2
nd
 Change Point Frequency 1 
Data setting 
range (Hz) 
0.5 to 400.0 
 
■  Parameter P121: The 2
nd
 Change   
Point Voltage 1 
Data setting 
range (%) 
0 to 100 
 
■  Parameter P122: The 2
nd
 Change   
Point Frequency 2 
Data setting 
range (Hz) 
0.5 to 400.0 
 
■  Parameter P123: The 2
nd
 Change Point Voltage 2 
Data setting 
range (%) 
0 to 100 
 
・Read “P005: V/F Mode” carefully before setting. 
・When set above base frequency, the 2
nd
 change point frequency 1 and 2 will 
operate according to the setting value of base frequency. 
・When set below the 2
nd
 change point frequency 1, the 2
nd
 change point 
frequency 2 will operate according to the the setting value of the 2
nd
 change 
point frequency 1. 
・When setting “P117: The 2
nd
 Torque Boost”, the 2
nd
 change point voltage 1 
and 2 will operate according to the setting value of the 2
nd
 torque boost if they 
are set below the 2
nd
 torque boost level. 
・When set below the 2
nd
 change point voltage 1, the 2
nd
 change point voltage 
2 will operate according to the the setting value of the 2
nd
 change point voltage 
1.  





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
236
・Please note that sharp acceleration/deceleration or overcurrent may occur 
depending on setting values and load status if data is changed during 
operation. 
・If auto torque boost is selected with parameter “P117: The 2
nd
 Torque Boost”, 
auto torque boost will take precedence, and settings related to 3-point mode 
(parameters P120 to P123: Change Point Voltage and Change Point 
Frequency) will become invalid. 
 
Related parameters: P005, P008, P036 to P040, P116, P117 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
237 
 
P124  The 2
nd
 Analog Input Function Select 
The control function of the 2
nd
 analog input terminal (control circuit terminal 
No.16) can be selected.   
 
Name 
Setting 
value 
Details 
0 
The 2
nd
 frequency setting signal 
1 
Measured value of PID control 
2 
Bias signal of PID control 
The 2
nd
 
analog 
input 
function 
select 
3 
Auxiliary frequency setting signal 
 
■The 2
nd
 frequency setting signal (setting value = “0”)   
・ 
The 2
nd
 analog input terminal can be used as the 2
nd
 frequency setting signal.
 
・Frequency setting command can be switched between the 1
st
 frequency 
setting signal and the 2
nd
 frequency setting signal depending on the input 
status set with parameter “P036 to P040: SW1 to SW5 Function Select”. 
SW with OFF input: the 1
st
 frequency setting signal 
SW with ON input: the 2
nd
 frequency setting signal 
 
■  Measured value of PID control (setting value = “1”)
 
・The 2
nd
 analog input terminal can be used as feedback signal of PID control 
(measured value PV). 
・Input signals (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA) are fed back as 
measured values (PVs) of PID control (positive values: 0 to100%). 
・After parameter P124 is set to “1”, set target value (SP) to the output 
frequency through parameter “P004: Frequency Setting Signal” to perform 
PID control so that measured value PV will approach target value SP and the 
output frequency will be changed accordingly.   
・When parameter “P004: Frequency Setting Signal” is specified as “1” or “7”, 
parameter “P111: PID Target Value” can be used.   
・Parameters for PID control can be set with parameter P106 to P111.
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
238 
■  Bias signal of PID control (setting value = “2”) 
・The 2
nd
 analog input terminal can be used as measured value of PID control 
(bias signal). 
・Input signals (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA) are fed back as 
bias signal of PID control (setting example: -10% to +10%). 
・Bias value can be converted inside the inverter with parameter “P126: The 
2
nd
 Bias Frequency Setting”, “P127: The 2
nd
 Gain Frequency Setting” and 
“P157: The 2
nd
 Analog Superimposed Value Setting”. 
<Example> When the analog input ranges from 0 to 5 V and both the 2
nd
 bias 
value and the 2
nd
 gain are set to “10” 
 
・After parameter P124 is set to “2”, set target value (SP) to the output 
frequency through parameter “P004: Frequency Setting Signal” to perform 
PID control that approaches target value SP depending on the bias signal 
input to the analog input terminals. The output frequency will also be changed 
accordingly. In this case, the inverter’s output frequency is determined by the 
following formula.
 
 
Output frequency = Max. output frequency×(The 1
st
 frequency setting signal 
(%) + bias signal (%)) 
 
・The value of the 1
st
 frequency setting signal (%) depends on the value of 
parameter “P004: Frequency Setting Signal”.But when parameter “P004: 
Frequency Setting Signal” is specified as “1” or “7”, parameter “P111: PID 
Target Value” can be used.
 
・Parameters for PID control can be set with parameter P106 to P111. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
239
■Auxiliary frequency setting signal (setting value = “3”)   
・The 2
nd
 analog input terminal can be used as auxiliary frequency setting 
signal. 
・Input signals (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA) are fed back as 
auxiliary frequency setting signal added to the 1
st
 frequency setting signal (%) 
(setting example: -10% to +10%). 
・The setting value of auxiliary frequency setting signal is converted inside the 
inverter with parameter “P126: The 2
nd
 Bias Frequency Setting”, “P127: The 
2
nd
 Gain Frequency Setting” and “P157: The 2
nd
 Analog Superimposed Value 
Setting”. 
<Example> When the analog input ranges from 0 to 5 V and both the 2
nd
 bias 
value and the 2
nd
 gain are set to “10” 
 
・It can be used when the result of PID calculation made by external devices 
such as PLC is added to the speed command value. 
・The inverter’s output frequency is determined by the following formula. 
 
Output frequency = Max. output frequency×(The 1
st
 frequency setting signal 
(%) + auxiliary frequency setting signal (%)) 
 
・The value of the 1
st
 frequency setting signal (%) depends on the value of 
parameter “P004: Frequency Setting Signal”. But when parameter “P004: 
Frequency Setting Signal” is specified as “1” or “7”, parameter “P111: PID 
Target Value” can be used. 
 
Related parameters: P004, P036 to P040, P106 to P111, P125 to P127, P157
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
240
P125 
The 2
nd
 Analog Input Signal Select 
Setting signal of the 2
nd
 analog input terminal (control circuit terminal No.16) 
can be selected. 
 
Setting 
value 
Details of setting signal 
Operation method and control circuit terminal 
connection diagram 
3 
0 to 5 V (voltage signal)  Terminals No.16 and 15 (16: +, 15: -) 
4 
0 to 10 V (voltage signal)  Terminals No.16 and 15 (16: +, 15: -) 
5 
4 to 20 mA (current signal) 
Terminals No.16 and 15 (16: +, 15: -): a 200 Ω 
resistor is connected between No.16 and No.15. 
6 
0 to 20 mA (current signal) 
Terminals No.16 and 15 (16: +, 15: -): a 200 Ω 
resistor is connected between No.16 and No.15. 
 
 
・If 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA signal is used, please connect a “200 Ω resistor” 
between terminal No.16 and 15.(If the 200 Ω resistor is not connected, the 
inverter could be damaged.) 
・The inverter will run or stop as defined by the setting value of “P101: 0 V 
Stop Function Select”.   
To make 0 V stop function invalid, please set parameter P101 to “0000”. 
(Refer to “0 V Stop Function Select” on page 222.) 
 
Related parameters: P101, P124, P126, P127 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
241
P126 
P127 
The 2
nd
 Bias Frequency Setting 
The 2
nd
 Gain Frequency Setting 
The relationship between the output frequency and the 2
nd
 analog input signal 
(control circuit terminal No.16) can be adjusted freely.   
Please use this function according to the applications. 
 
■  Parameter P126: The 2
nd
 Bias Frequency Setting 
Data setting range (%)  -99.0 to 250.0 
 
■  Parameter P127: The 2
nd
 Gain Frequency Setting 
Data setting range (%)  0.0 to 500.0 
・The 2
nd
 bias frequency and the 2
nd
 gain frequency can be set with the ratio 
(%) of the maximum output frequency (100%) (parameter P008). 
・The frequency exceeding the maximum frequency or the upper frequency 
limit will not be output. 
Also, the frequency will not drop below the lower frequency limit. 
・The inverter will not run in reverse direction even if negative frequency 
setting signal is input. 
 
■  The relationship between the 2
nd
 frequency setting signal ang the output 
frequency 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
242
■  The relationship between the feedback signal and the measured value 
(PV) of PID control 
(When parameter “P124: The 2
nd
 Analog Input Function Select” is set to “1”.) 
 
 
 
・The frequency exceeding the maximum frequency or the upper frequency 
limit will not be output. 
Also, the frequency will not drop below the lower frequency limit. 
・The inverter will not perform reverse run operation even if the 2
nd
 frequency 
setting signal input is a negative value.   
Feedback signal of PID control for negative values is 0%. 
・The 2
nd
 bias frequency and the 2
nd
 gain frequency have no connection with 
the setting values of bias/gain function select (parameter P102). 
 
Related parameters: P005, P008, P036 to P040, P124, P125, P106 to P111 
 
 
 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
243
P128  Carrier Frequency 
This carrier frequency can be adjusted to reduce motor noise and avoid 
mechanical resonance. 
 
■  When “P129: Vector Control Select” setting = “0” (when V/F control is 
selected) 
Setting value (kHz)  0.8, 1.1, 1.6, 2.5, 5.0, 7.5 , 10.0 (7 settings) 
 
■  When “P129: Vector Control Select” setting = “1” (when vector control is 
selected) 
Setting value (kHz)  2.5, 5.0, 7.5, 10.0 (4 settings) 
 
 
・This setting can be changed during operation, but the following change 
between low frequency group and high frequency group can be made only 
when the inverter is stopped.   
Low frequency group: 0.8 to 1.6 kHz 
High frequency group: 2.5 to 10.0 kHz 
・When the carrier frequency is set to 7.5 kHz for a 3.7 KW+ inverter, please 
derate the output current according to the limitations on page 132.   
・When the carrier frequency is set to 7.5 kHz or 10.0 kHz, it will vary 
depending on the output frequency.
 
For 1-phase 200 V type 
1) When set to 7.5 kHz, carrier frequency of 5.0 kHz will be output for 
frequency band of 0.5 to 5 Hz. 
2) When set to 10.0 kHz, carrier frequency of 5.0 kHz and 7.5 kHz will be 
output for frequency band of 0.5 to 5 Hz and 5 to 10 Hz respectively.   
For 3-phase 400V type 
1) When set to 7.5 kHz, carrier frequency of 5.0 kHz will be output for 
frequency band of 0.5 to 10 Hz. 
2) When set to 10.0 kHz, carrier frequency of 5.0 kHz and 7.5 kHz will be 
output for frequency band of 0.5 to 10 Hz and 10 to 15 Hz respectively. 
 
Related parameter: P129 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
244
P129 
Vector Control Select 
This function is effective for the case that the load fluctuates sharply when 
high start-up torque or sufficient torque at lower speed is required. But it is not 
applicable to the load whose minor rotation may cause problems at lower 
speed.  
Setting value  Details 
0 
V/F control 
1 
Vector control 
 
●In vector control mode, please use the inverter in the following conditions. 
・A squirrel-cage or induction motor for general purpose should be selected.   
・Please select the inverter with the capacity equivalent to or 1 level higher 
than motor capacity. 
<Exampel 1> Please select a 0.75 kW inverter for motor ranging from 0.4 
kW to 0.75 kW (including 0.75 kW).   
<Exampel 2> Please select a 1.5 kW inverter for motor ranging from 0.75 
kW to 1.5 kW (including 1.5 kW). 
・The motor must be a 2-pole, 4-pole or 6-pole one. 
・It must operate in standalone mode (i.e., one motor is driven by one 
inverter). 
・The maximum wiring length between the inverter and motor must not exceed 
30 m. 
・The carrier frequency should be higher than 2.5 kHz. 
If the above conditions are not satisfied, sound operation performance cannot 
be achieved. 
 
●In vector control mode, carrier frequency in area where output frequency is 
relatively lower may vary accordingly. 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
245
■  Setting procedure when vector control is selected 
1) Control method select: Vector control select (set P129 to “1”). 
2) Motor capacity select  : Capacity of motor in use is set to “P130: Motor 
Capacity).(0.4 to 15kW) 
Motor capacity = Inverter capacity (factory setting) 
If the motor capacity is equal to the inverter, no 
additional setting will be required. 
3) Motor polarity setting  : Motor polarity to be used can be set with “P131:   
Motor Pole Number”.(2/4/6 poles) 
Factory setting of motor polarity is 4-pole.   
If the motor polarity is 4-pole, no additional setting 
will be required.  
4) Trial operation  : If required motor characteristics have been acquired, it 
indicates that the setting is complete.   
(Operation under motor constant is recommended 
by our company.) 
If the required motor characteristics have not been 
acquired, the following settings need to be made.   
5) Motor constant setting : When motor constant is known beforehand 
・Setting of “P133: Voltage Compensation 
Constant” 
・Setting of “P134: Slip Compensation Frequency” 
When motor constant is unknown beforehand, 
automatic tuning will be performed.   
・“P132: Motor Constant Measuring Function” can 
be set to “1” to measure voltage compensation 
constant. 
・“P132: Motor Constant Measuring Function” can 
be set to “2” to measure slip compensation 
frequency. 
6) Trial operation  : If required motor characteristics have been acquired, it 
indicates that the setting is complete.   
If required motor characteristics have not been 
acquired after setting motor constant through P133 
and P134, automatic tuning will be performed. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
246
 
・When vector control is selected, the output frequency ranges from 1 Hz to 
120 Hz. 
・Vector control select is valid only when “P128: Carrier Frequency” is from 2.5 
kHz to 10.0 kHz. 
When carrier frequency is set to “0.8 kHz to 1.6 kHz” and “P129: Vector 
Control Select” is set to “1” (vector control), the setting value of carrier 
frequency will be changed to 2.5 kHz automatically. 
・For the 2
nd
 motor, related parameters are as follows: 
“P158: The 2
nd
 Motor Capacity”, “P159: The 2
nd
 Motor Pole Number”, “P160: 
The 2
nd
 Voltage Compensation Constant” and “P161: The 2
nd
 Slip 
Compensation Frequency”. 
 
Related parameters: P128, P130 to P134, P158 to P161 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
247
 
P130  Motor Capacity 
・During vector control or when auto torque boost or slip compensation is 
performed through V/F control, inverter capacity used to drive the motor can 
be set.   
Setting value  Motor capacity    Setting value  Motor capacity 
0.2 
0.2 kW 
 3.7 
3.7 kW 
0.4 
0.4 kW 
 5.5 
5.5 kW 
0.7 
0.75 kW 
 7.5 
7.5 kW 
1.5 
1.5 kW 
 11.0 
11.0 kW 
2.2 
2.2 kW 
 15.0 
 15.0 kW 
 
 
・After setting value is changed, motor constants recommended by our 
company will be assigned to “P133: Voltage Compensation Constant” and 
“P134: Slip Compensation Frequency”.   
 
Related parameters: P129, P131 to P134 
 
P131  Motor Pole Number 
・During vector control or when auto torque boost or slip compensation is 
performed through V/F control, pole number required to drive the motor can 
be set. 
Setting value 
Motor Pole 
Number 
2 
2 poles 
4 
4 poles 
6 
6 poles 
 
 
・After setting value is changed, motor constants recommended by our 
company will be assigned to “P133: Voltage Compensation Constant” and 
“P134: Slip Compensation Frequency”.   
 
Related parameters: P129 to P130, P131 to P134 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
248
P132 
Motor Constant Measuring Function 
・During vector control or when auto torque boost or slip compensation is 
performed through V/F control, motor constant can be set through “automatic 
tuning” or specified as values recommended by our company.
 
 
 
・When automatic tuning of voltage compensation 
constant starts, the inverter will automatically apply 
DC high-voltage to the motor. Therefore, do not 
approach the unit. 
Failure to do so may result in electric shock. 
・When automatic tuning of slip compensation freuqncy 
starts, the inverter will drive the motor at 60 Hz. 
Therefore, do not approach the unit. 
Failure to do so may result in injury.   
 
Setting value  Details 
0 
It indicates the value in normal status. 
* The value is set in case that automatic tuning mode status for setting 
value “1” and “2” is cancelled.   
1 
When voltage compensation constant is set to automatic tuning mode: 
When the inverter returns to operation status display mode and enters 
measurement status after data setting, the constant measurement can 
be started by pressing RUNSW button. 
2 
When slip compensation constant is set to automatic tuning mode: 
When the inverter returns to operation status display mode and enters 
measurement status after data setting, the constant measurement can 
be started by pressing RUNSW button. 
3 
Constants recommended by our company will be assigned to “P133: 
Voltage Compensation Constant” and “P134: Slip Compenstion 
Frequency” according to the setting values of “P130: Motor Capacity” 
and “P131: Motor Pole Number”. (If constants for P133 and P134 are 
changed after data setting, the setting value will become “0” 
automatically.) 
 
 
・Please perform automatic tuning when the motor is fully stopped.   
・ Please perform automatic tuning of slip compensation frequency when 
there is no load on the motor shaft. 
・Acceleration time for automatic tuning of slip compensation frequency can 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
249
be set with P001. When acceleration time is too short, overcurrent trip may 
occur and tuning operation cannot be performed correctly.   
・Automatic tuning sometimes cannot be performed when the inverter is 
affected by power supply environment and connected with special-purpose 
motor etc. In this case, set parameter P133 and P134 manually. 
・For the 2
nd
 motor, related parameters are as follows: 
“P158: The 2
nd
 Motor Capacity”, “P159: The 2
nd
 Motor Pole Number”, “P160: 
The 2
nd
 Voltage Compensation Constant” and “P161: The 2
nd
 Slip 
Compensation Frequency”. 
・When automatic tuning of motor constant and PID control are set 
simultaneously, the latter will take precedence.  
 
Related parameters: P129 to P131, P133, P134, P158 to P161 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
250
■  Operation procedure of automatic tuning 
1. Switch to automatic tuning mode setting 
・When voltage compensation constant is measured, P132 is set to “1”. 
・When slip compensation frequency is measured: P132 is set to “2”. 
2. Enter measurement ready status 
Press 
  button to enter operation status display mode. 
・Displayed when voltage compensation constant is 
measured (P132 = “1”) 
・Displayed when slip compensation frequency is 
measured (P132 = “2”) 
 
 
 
3. Automatic tuning starts 
Press 
  button to start automatic tuning. 
・When voltage compensation constant is measured 
Normally the inverter will automatically apply high DC 
voltage to the motor for 2 s. The display flickers during 
measurement (P132 = “1”).   
・When slip compensation frequency is measured 
The inverter will drive the motor automatically at 60 Hz.   
The tuning operation will normally last until (the 1
st
 
acceleration time + 5 s) has elapsed. The display flickers 
during measurement (P132 = “2”).   
4. Automatic tuning completes 
When automatic tuning completes, data will be written to 
parameter P133 or P134 automatically, indicating that 
automatic tuning is complete.   
・The display indicate that voltage compensation constant 
measurement is complete.   
・The display indicate that frequency compensation 
frequency measurement is complete. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
251
5. Enter operation ready status (normal stop status) 
Press 
  button to enter operation ready status. 
After that, normal operation can be performed. 
・For the 2
nd
 motor, related parameters are as follows. 
“P158: The 2
nd
 Motor Capacity”, “P159: The 2
nd
 Motor Pole 
Number”, “P160: The 2
nd
 Voltage Compensation Constant” 
and “P161: The 2
nd
 Slip Compensation Frequency”. 
 
●When tuning result is beyond specific range 
Sometimes, special-purpose motors such as high-speed motor 
and high-slip motor etc. cannot be tuned correctly. In case that 
improper tuning is performed, “tEr1” and “tEr2” will be displayed 
and fault trip will occur. Just press STOP SW button to reset.   
 
P133  Voltage Compensation Constant 
During vector control or when auto torque boost is performed through V/F 
control, necessary voltage compensation constants should be set.   
 
Setting value (V) 
0.01 to 99.99 (increment = 
0.01) 
 
The setting value of voltage compensation constant can be calculated by the 
following formula. 
Setting value = R x I    R: including one-phase resistance of wiring 
(1/2 of measured resistance between motor 
terminals) 
I: Equivalent current (Equivalet to rated current of 
inverter corresponding to motor with same 
capacity) 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
252
For 1-phase 200 V type  For 3-phase 400V type 
Motor 
capacity 
Equivalent 
current (A) 
Motor 
capacity 
Equivalent 
current (A) 
Motor 
capacity 
Equivalent 
current (A) 
0.2 kW  2.3  0.4 kW  1.6  5.5 kW  12.0 
0.4 kW  3.0  0.75 kW  2.1  7.5 kW  17.0 
0.75 kW  5.0  1.5 kW  4.0  11 kW  22.0 
1.5 kW  8.0  2.2 kW  6.0  15 kW  31.0 
2.2 kW  11.0 
 
3.7 kW  9.4     
 
 
・If the setting value is too high, overcurrent trip may occur. 
・If the setting value is too low, torque insufficiency may occur at lower speed. 
・Automatic tuning sometimes cannot be performed when the inverter is 
affected by power supply environment and connected with special-purpose 
motor etc. In this case, please make manual settings according to relevant 
methods.  
“P133: Voltage Compensation Constant” can be tuned automatically with 
“P132: Motor Constant Measuring Function”.   
 
Related parameters: P129 to P132, P134 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
253
P134  Slip Compensation Frequency 
During vector control or when slip compensation is performed through V/F 
control, slip compensation frequency can be set.   
 
Setting value (Hz)  -5.00 to 5.00 (increment = 0.01)
 
Slip compensation frequency is set by converting slip (at 60 Hz) to frequency 
value. 
Please make settings according to the following method. 
 
 
・If the setting value is relatively high, RPM of motor may be higher than the 
target value. 
・When the setting value is relatively low, RPM of motor may be lower than the 
target value. 
・Automatic tuning sometimes cannot be performed when the inverter is 
affected by power supply environment and connected with special-purpose 
motor etc. In this case, please make manual settings according to relevant 
methods.  
“P134: Slip Compensation Frequency” can also be tuned automatically with 
“P132: Motor Constant Measuring Function”. 
 
Related parameters: P129 to P133, P156, P158 to P161 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
254
P135 
P139
P136  P140
P137  P141
P138 
Communication Protocol Select 
Communication Station No. Setting
Communication Speed Setting 
Stop Bit Length
 
P142
Parity Check 
Timeout Sensing 
Wait-to-send Time 
Judging Time for TEXT Completion
 
Important parameters necessary for sending commands to inverter through 
communication can be set.   
 
■  P135: Communication Protocol Select 
VF200 is based on two protocols: MEWTOCOL-COM and Modbus (RTU). 
Either protocol can be selected.   
Setting value  Details of function 
0 
MEWTOCOL-COM 
1 
Modbus (RTU) 
 
■  P136: Communication Station No. Setting 
Data setting range  1 to 31 
 
■  P137: Communication Speed Setting 
Setting value  Details of function 
48 
4800 bps 
96 
9600 bps 
192 
19200 bps 
384 
38400 bps 
 
■  P138: Stop Bit Length 
Setting value  Details of function 
1 
1 bit 
2 
2 bit 
 
■  P139: Parity Check 
Setting value  Details of function 
0 
Without parity check 
1 
Odd parity 
2 
Even parity 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
255
■  P140: Timeout Sensing 
Data setting range (s)  0000· 0.1 to 60.0 
* “0000” indicates a setting without timeout sensing.   
■  P141: Wait-to-send Time 
Data setting range 
(ms) 
1 to 1000 
■  P142: Judging Time for TEXT Completion 
Data setting range 
(ms) 
3 to 200 
*The setting is valid only when protocol Modbus (RTU) is used. 
 
· For details of communication function, please refer to “VF200 
communication function manual”, which can be downloaded from our website: 
http://pewc.panasonic.cn/ac/c/.   
· After setting values for communication parameter P135 to P142, please cut 
off the power once.   
After the power supply reset, the setting values will be applied in the inverter. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
256
P143  Cooling Fan ON-OFF Control Select 
・Operation modes of cooling fan in normal status and fault status can be set.   
Details 
Setting 
value 
Operation of cooling fan 
Operation when heat sink 
is faulty 
0 
Power-on: ON 
Power-off :OFF 
The inverter stops 
abnormally.  
1 
Power-on: ON 
Heat sink temperature is 
below 100  ℃: OFF 
The inverter stops 
abnormally.  
2 
Power-on: ON 
Power-off :OFF 
The inverter does not stop 
but sends out alarm. 
3 
Power-on: ON 
Heat sink temperature is 
below 100  ℃: OFF 
The inverter does not stop 
but sends out alarm. 
 
 
・The parameter is invalid to models without cooling fan (1-phase 200 V/ 0.2 to 
0.75 kW model and 3-phase 400 V/0.75 kW model). 
 
P144  Input Terminal Filter 
Filter constant of control circuit terminals (No.2 to No.8) can be set in the 
inverter to effectively remove interference of external signal input.   
Setting value (times)  5 to 100 (Increment = 1) 
 
 
・If the setting value is too high, the interference resistance capability will be 
enhanced, but response speed of control input terminals will decrease. 
・If the setting value is too low, the interference resistance capability will be 
weakened, but response speed of control input terminals will increase. 
・When start/stop, forward run and reverse run signal (terminal No.2 and No.3) 
are used to operate the inverter, internal processing time of the inverter will 
become longer even if the setting value is low. In this case, response speed of 
control input terminals will be slower than other terminals.   





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
257
P145 
Operation Status Monitor 
Display on the panel can be adjusted according to applications. 
 
* The values above are examples of display for “operating frequency (50.0)”, “output current 
(1.0 A)”, “setting frequency (50.0)”, “communication station No. (01)” and “linear speed 
multiplier (0.5)”. 
 
 
·In “operation status display mode”, current display will be shown by pressing 
SET button.   
·Operation ready status in this manual is recorded as “0000”, but the display 
will vary with setting values when this parameter is changed. 
 
Related parameter: P146 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
258
P146  Linear Speed Multiplier 
When setting value in “P145: Operation Status Monitor” is “1” (linear speed), 
multiplier relative to output frequency can be set.   
 
■  Parameter P146: Linear Speed Multiplier 
Data setting range 
0.1 to 100.0 
 
<Setting example> When linear speed is displayed 
Linear speed (m/min) = F (Hz)  × K (multiplier) 
·To display linear speed 25 (m/min) at 50 Hz, set multiplier 
(K) to “0.5”. 
 
·Linear speed exceeding “9999” is displayed as “9.9.9.9”. 
 
Related parameter: P145 
 
P147  Alarm LED Operation Select 
Alarm LED operation of the panel can be selected with this parameter. 
 
Setting value  Function name  Details of Function 
0 
N/A  N/A (The LED lights up when fault trip occurs) 
1 
Full monitor 
alarm 
When any of the specified conditions (output voltage 
fault, overload, temperature abnormality, timer 
operation stop and cooling fan abnormality) is 
satisfied, the alarm LED will flicker. 
2 
Output voltage 
Fault alarm 
When the setting value (P147) is reached, the alarm 
LED will flicker.   
3 
Overload alarm 
When the setting value (P148) is reached, the alarm 
LED will flicker.   
4 
Abnormal 
temperature 
alarm 
When heat sink temperature rises above 80 °C, the 
alarm LED will flicker.   
5 
Timer stop 
signal 
When timer operation is complete, the alarm LED will 
flicker.  
(The signal is linked with timer operation function. 
When ∞ is displayed, the alarm LED will not flicker.) 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
259
6 
Abnormal 
cooling fan 
alarm 
When cooling fan abnormality occurs, the alarm LED 
will flicker. 
 
·If fault trip occurs, the alarm LED will light up. 
·Monitor function “n008: Alarm Type” can be used to identify the type of the 
current alarm.   
·When alarm LED operation select (parameter P147) is set to “1” and several 
alarms occur simultaneously, the alarm display order is as follows.   
(If a higher-priority alarm is in operation, it will still be displayed even if a 
lower-priority alarm enters.) 
 
 
·When settings of “P090 to P092: Output TR1, TR2 and Ry Function Select” 
are set to “11”, it can be output to the external devices as alarm signal. 
 
Related parameters: P148, P149 
 
P148  Upper Voltage Limit of Alarm LED 
When alarm LED operation select is set to “1” or “2”, the upper voltage limit to 
judge output voltage fault alarm can be set with this parameter. 
If output voltage of inverter is higher than setting value, the alarm LED will 
flicker as output voltage fault alarm. 
 
Data setting range (V) 
0.1 to 600.0 
 
Related parameter: P147 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
260
P149  Upper Current Limit of Alarm LED 
When alarm LED operation select is set to “1” or “3”, the upper current limit to 
judge overload fault alarm can be set with this parameter. 
If output current of inverter is higher than setting value, the alarm LED will 
flicker as overload fault alarm. 
 
Data setting range (A) 
0.1 to 100.0 
 
Related parameter: P147 
 
P150  Password 
To prevent accidental changes to the data after parameter setting is complete, 
password can be set with this parameter. 
 
Data setting range 
0000·1 to 9999 
* “0000” indicates that there is no password.   
 
To set a password, press MODE button in “control status monitor mode” and 
password input display switches to “PS”. After entering the password and pressing 
SET button, you will have access to “custom mode”, “function setting mode” and 
“built-in memory setting mode”.   
If you do not enter the password when password input display switches to “PS”, 
the display will return to “operation status display mode” as MODE button is 
pressed.  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
261
■  Procedures of changing parameter data after setting password 
·When password is set to “7777” 
 
1. Enter operation status display mode 
(Press    button to stop the inverter during operation.) 
2. Enter password input display mode 
Press 
  button four times to enter password input 
display mode. (“PS” will flicker.) 
* If the password is unknown, press 
 
button to return 
to “0000”.   
3. Display password 
Press 
/
 
button to display a preset password. 
(The displaying part will flicker.) 
4. Display “custom mode” 
Press 
  button to display “custom mode”. 
(Example: when the previous parameter No. is U001) 
 
The operation procedures afterwards are just the same as that of changing 
normal data. 
 
·After parameter setting, “Custom Mode”, “Function Setting Mode” and 
“Built-in Memory Setting Mode” cannot be entered without inputting the 
password. 
(Please keep your password secure so as not to forget it.) 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
262
P151  Setting Data Clear 
All data can be restored to factory settings with this parameter. 
 
Setting value  Details 
0 
It indicates the value in normal status. 
1 
Except motor constants, all data will be restored to factory settings.* 
2 
All data will be restored to factory settings. 
3 
Functions allocated in “custom mode” will be restored to factory 
settings. 
 
* Motor constants 
Parameter No. 
Name 
For the 1
st
 motor  For the 2
nd
 motor 
Motor capacity 
P130 P158 
Motor pole number 
P131 P159 
Voltage Compensation 
Constant 
P133 P160 
Slip Compensation 
Frequency 
P134 P161 
 
 
·When the setting value is changed to a value other than “0” and SET button 
is pressed, the display will automatically switch to “0” afterwards to apply the 
change.  
 
P152 
P153 
DC Brake Time during Startup 
DC Brake Level during Startup 
·After pause stop, coast-to-stop motorscan be restarted with this parameter. 
 
Parameter No.  Name  Setting range 
P152 
DC Brake Time during 
Startup 
0000 
0.1 to 120 (s) 
P153 
DC Brake Level during 
Startup 
0 to 100 (%) 
*1: When DC brake function is not used, set P152 to “0000”.   
*2: It can be set with increment of 5%. The higher the value is, the stronger the brake force is.   





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
263
 
 
 
·The start frequency is specified by parameter “P029: Start Frequency”. 
・Please note that sharp acceleration/deceleration or overcurrent may occur 
depending on setting values and load status if data is changed during   
operation. 
·When parameter “P162: Speed Search during Startup” is set to “enabled”, 
the setting value of DC brake set with this parameter is “disabled”. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
264
P154 
P155 
MOP Function Select 
Acceleration/deceleration Time for MOP Operation
 
Operation of frequency change can be set with these parameters when MOP 
function is used. 
When acceleration/deceleration time is relatively short, frequency change is 
much easier with this function.   
■ Parameter P154: MOP Function Select   
Setting 
value 
Function name  Details 
0 
Operation linked with 
acceleration/deceleration 
time 
Acceleration/deceleration is performed according 
to the acceleration/deceleration time set with 
parameter P001 and P002. 
1 
MOP operation linked with 
acceleration/deceleration 
time 
Press UP/DOWN button to perform 
acceleration/deceleration according to the 
acceleration/deceleration time set with parameter P155. 
2 
Operation linked with 
frequency setting 
Press UP/DOWN button to switch to frequency setting 
mode. But if operation linkage is not performed, press 
SET button after frequency is selected and 
acceleration/deceleration will be performed according 
to the acceleration/deceleration time set with parameter 
P001 and P002.   
 
■ Parameter P155: Acceleration/deceleration Time for MOP Operation 
Data setting range (s) 
0.04·0.1 to 3600 
Increment (s) 
0.1 (0.1 to 999.9), 1 (1000 to 3600) 
· When parameter P154 is set to “1”, applicable acceleration/deceleration time   
can be set with this parameter. 
· When the data setting range is “0.04 s”, the display is “0000”. 
· The maximum frequency is set with parameter P005 and P008. 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
265
 
·This function still applies even if parameter “P040: SW5 Function Select” is 
set to “11: Frequency  ▲/▼  setting
”. But when P154 is set to “2”, 
acceleration/deceleration will be performed according to 
acceleration/deceleration time set with parameter P001 and P002. 
 
■Operation when parameter P154 is set to “2: Operation linked with 
frequency setting” 
·If  ▲/
▼button is pressed when the operating frequency is displayed, the 
displayed data will flicker and enter frequency setting status. 
 
·If SET button is pressed, operation will 
be started according to the new 
frequency value applied beforehand and acceleration/deceleration will be 
performed.   
·Press MODE button with displayed data flickering to return to the previous 
status.   
 
Related parameters: P001, P002, P005, P008, P040, P154 
 
 
 
 
 
SET
SET
MODE
MODE
Operation frequency
setting status(flickering)
Operation 
frequency
display status
Operation 
frequency
display status
Deceleration
Acceleration
30Hz → 40Hz
30Hz → 20Hz





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
266
P156  Slip Compensation Control 
During V/F control, the slip in relation to speed comman value is detected and slip 
compensation is controlled with this parameter. 
Setting value 
Details 
0 
Without slip compensation 
1 
Slip compensation made in normal status 
2 
Slip compensation not performed during 
deceleration 
 
 
·During slip compensation control, parameter “P130: Motor Capacity”, “P131: 
Motor Pole Number” and “P134: Slip Compensation Frequency” must be set. 
“P134: Slip Compensation Frequency” can also be tuned automatically by 
“P132: Motor Constant Measurement Function”. 
· For the 2
nd
 motor, related parameters are as follows. 
“P158: The 2
nd
 Motor Capacity”, “P159: The 2
nd
 Motor Pole Number” and 
“P161: The 2
nd
 Slip Compensation Frequency”. 
· In slip compensation control mode, please use the inverter in the following 
conditions.   
· The motor must be the squirrel-cage induction motor for general purpose. 
· Please select the inverter with the capacity equivalent to or 1 level higher 
than motor capacity. 
 
< Example 1> Please select a 0.75 kW inverter for motor ranging from 0.4 kW to 
0.75 kW. 
< Example 2> Please select a 1.5 kW inverter for motor ranging from 0.75 kW to 
1.5 kW. 
· The motor must be a 2-pole, 4-pole or 6-pole one.   
· It must be operated under standalone mode (i.e., one motor is driven by one 
inverter).   
·The maximum wiring length between the inverter and motor must not exceed 
30 m. 
If the above conditions are not satisfied, sound operation performance cannot 
be achieved. 
· During vector control, this parameter is invalid. 
· When slip compensation control is selected, the output frequency ranges 
from 1 Hz to 120 Hz. 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
267
P157  The 2
nd
 Analog Superimposed Value 
Bias value can be superimposed to the 2
nd 
analog input value with this 
parameter. 
Name  Setting range 
The 2
nd
 Analog 
Superimposed 
Value 
-100.0% to  +100.0% 
 
Related parameters: P124, P126 to P127 
 
·For setting method, please refer to “P124: The 2
nd
 Analog Input Function 
Select”. 
 
P158  The 2
nd
 Motor Capacity 
・During vector control or when auto torque boost or slip compensation is 
performed through V/F control, inverter capacity used to drive the motor can 
be set.   
·Related setting values are the same as the those of 1
st
 motor. Please refer to 
parameter “P130: Motor Capacity”. 
 
 
·If data is changed, the setting values of parameter “P160: The 2
nd
 Voltage 
Compensation Constant” and “P161: The 2
nd
 Slip Compensation Frequency” 
will be automatically changed to motor constants recommended by our 
company. 
 
P159  The 2
nd
 Motor Pole Number 
・During vector control or when auto torque boost or slip compensation is 
performed through V/F control, pole number required to drive the motor can 
be set. 
·Related setting values are the same as the those of 1
st
 motor. Please refer to 
parameter “P131: Motor Pole Number”. 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
268
 
·If data is changed, the setting values of parameter “P160: The 2
nd
 Voltage 
Compensation Constant” and “P161: The 2
nd
 Slip Compensation Frequency” 
will be automatically changed to motor constants recommended by our 
company. 
 
P160  The 2
nd
 Voltage Compensation Constant 
·During vector control or when auto torque boost is performed through V/F 
control, necessary voltage compensation constants should be set.   
·Related setting values are the same as the those of 1
st
 motor. Please refer to 
parameter “P133: Voltage Compenstion Constant”. 
 
 
“P160: The 2
nd
 Voltage Compensation Constant” can be tuned automatically 
with “P132: Motor Constant Measuring Function”. 
 
 
P161  The 2
nd
 Slip Compensation Frequency 
·During vector control or when auto torque boost is performed through V/F 
control, necessary voltage compensation constants should be set. 
 
·Related setting values are the same as the those of 1
st
 motor. Please refer to 
parameter “P134: Slip Compenstion Frequency”. 
 
 
“P161: The 2
nd
 Slip Compensation Frequency” can also be tuned 
automatically by “P132: Motor Constant Measurement Function”. 
 
P162  Speed Search Select during Startup 
Whether speed search is performed or not during startup can be set with this 
parameter. 
 
 
 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
269
  Details 
0 
Speed search during startup is disabled.   
When speed search is selected with 
parameter “P036 to P040: SW1 to SW5 
Function Select”, speed search will be 
performed if relevant SWs are turned ON.   
1 
Speed search during startup is enabled.   
 
P163  Waiting time for speed search   
The waiting time to start speed search can be set with this parameter during 
speed search. 
 
· If “P026: Waiting Time” is set and the waiting time has elapsed, the inverter 
will enter waiting status according to the setting value of “Waiting Time for 
Speed Search” and then start speed search. 
 
P164  Voltage Recover Time for Speed Search 
The voltage can be applied gradually at the frequency detected during speed 
search. 
 
· If the setting value is too low, overcurrent trip may occur. 
 
 
 
Setting value
Setting range(s)
0.0 to 100.0 (s) 
Setting range(s)
0.1 to 10.0 (s) 





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
270
P165  Speed Search Select during Retry 
When retry function is set to “enabled” with parameter “P022: Retry Function”, 
whether speed search is performed or not during retry after fault occurrence 
can be set with this parameter.
 
  Details 
0 
Disabled: speed search is not performed 
during retry after fault occurrence. 
1 
Enabled: speed search is performed during 
retry after fault occurrence. 
 
P166  Speed Search Retry Select 
Whether speed search is performed again after speed search select failure 
can be set with this parameter.
 
  Details 
0 
When speed search fails or upper limit of 
retry times for speed search is exceeded, 
“SEr” is displayed on the operation panel 
and operation is stopped.
 
1 
When speed search fails or upper limit of 
retry times for speed search is exceeded, 
operation starts at the start frequency. 
 
P167  Speed Search Retry Times 
Speed search retry times can be set when “Speed Search Retry Select” is 
selected.   
Setting value
Setting value
Setting range(Times)
0 to 10





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
271
P168  Upper Frequency Limit Select for Speed Search 
Frequency range for speed search can be set with this parameter. 
Details 
0 
Speed search is performed 
below the maximum frequency. 
1 
Speed search is performed at 
the frequency lower than the 
previous frequency before the 
operation is stopped normally. 
 
P169  Winding Mode Control Select 
Whether winding mode control is selected or not and the amplititude during 
such control can be set with this parameter. 
Details 
0 
Winding mode control is OFF.
1 
Amplititude is set based on the 
setting frequency. 
2 
Amplititude is set based on the 
maximum frequency. 
 
P170  Amplitude in Winding Mode 
Frequency amplititude under winding mode control can be set with this 
parameter.
When P169 = 1, frequency amplitude (Hz) = setting frequency (Hz)  × 
amplitude in winding mode (%) 
When P169 = 2, frequency amplitude (Hz) = maximum frequency (Hz)  × 
amplitude in winding mode (%) 
For details of winding mode control, refer to P162. 
Setting value
Setting value
Setting range(%)
0.0%  to 100.0 %





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
272
 P171  Recoil Frequency Band in Winding Mode
P174  Pulse Input Signal Frequency
Percent of recoil frequency for frequency amplititude set with parameter P170 
can be set with this parameter.
 
P172  Winding Mode Cycle  P173
Rise Time Coefficient in 
Winding Mode
 
Time required for one cycle of winding mode control operation and the 
acceleration time in one cycle can be set with these parameters. 
 
Setting range (sec) 0.0~3600
Setting range (%) 0.0%  to 100.0%
Setting range (Hz) 1~10000(Setting unit:1Hz)
The formulas of acceleration/deceleration time below can be acquired via 
It is used when set “P87: PWM/pulse frequency signal select” to “2”.
Please set pulse input count per second (pulse frequency) when it is max output 
frequency.
setting of P172 and P173.   
Rise time of triangular-wave frequency = winding mode cycle (s)  ×  rise time 
coefficient of winding mode (%) 
Drop time of triangular-wave frequency = winding mode cycle (s)  ×  (100 - 
rise time coefficient of winding mode (%)) 
■ Winding Mode Period
Setting range (%) 0.0~100.0
■ Rise Time Coefficient in Winding Mode





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
273 
■ P175: Pulse Input Signal Bias
P175 
Pulse Input Signal Bias Pulse Input Signal Gain 
P176 
It can change the relationship between pulse frequency signal and output 
frequency. Please use as needed.
 
P177 
Pulse input signal filter  
It can be used for setting pulse input signal’s response. Please set when abnormal 
frequency be detected.
 
 
・Bias and gain are set by the proportion of max output frequency (parameter P008) .
・Don’t output frequency which is more than max output frequency and upper 
 limiting frequency. Frequency can not descend to frequency below lower rate limit.
・Even if input minus frequency signal, inverter won’t reverse.
 
Setting range (%) -99.0~100.0(Setting unit: 0.1%)
■ P176: Pulse Input Signal Gain
Setting range (%) 0.0~100.0(Setting unit: 0.1%)
Setting range (time) 10~100 (Setting unit: 1 time)
■ When bias is set to positiv ■ When bias is set to minus
Pulse input 
signal gain
(P176)
Pulse input 
signal gain
(P176)
Pulse input 
signal bias
(P175)
Pulse input 
signal bias
(P175)
Maximum output
 frequency
(P005, 008)
Maximum output
 frequency
(P005, 008)
Frequency pulse 
setting signal
Frequency pulse 
setting signal
Output frequency
Output frequency





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
274 
 P178  Winding Mode Operation Select
It is used for setting winding mode operation select.
 
When set “P178: winding mode operation select” to “2” or “3”, winding mode is 
random mode. Rise time is swing between “P179: max random rise time” and 
“P180: minimum random rise time”.
When set “P178: winding mode select” to “1” or “3”, and “P182: winding stop 
length” is not 0, winding mode is 2-point mode. Setting frequency will change by 
the increase of winding length, and will be “P046: second speed frequency” at last.
Especially, when P178 is set to “3”, 2-point mode, reference frequency change 
from setting frequency to second speed frequency by winding length, and rise 
time ratio change in random range.
■ Random mode
■ 2-point mode
2- point normal mode1
Normal mode0
NameValue
2- point random mode3
Random mode2
Frequency
Setting frequency
P046:
Second speed 
frequency
P183:Winding stop length
Winding length





Appendix  Function Parameter List 
275 
 
P179 
Max random rise time Minimum random rise time 
P180 
Set the max and minimum value of rise time for random function.
 
Setting range (%) 0.0~100.0(Setting unit: 0.1%)
P181 
Winding length multiplier
When set parameter “P169: winding mode control select” to “1” or “2”, and set 
parameter “P036: SW1 function select” to “14”, input pulse in SW1, it can be 
used for calculating the length of “P181: winding length multiplier”.
Setting range (%) 0.0~100.0(Setting unit: 0.1%)
P182 
Winding stop length
·When setting value is 0, winding mode stop working.
·The relationship between setting value and display is as follow.
 When 1m~9,999m, display as 1~9999.
 When 10,000m~99,999m, display as 1.000~9.999.
 When 100,000m~600,000m, display as 10.00~60.00.
When winding length is counted to stop length, winding mode will stop.
Setting range (m) 0~60.00 (Setting unit: 1m)





276
“Administrative Measures for Control of 
Pollution Caused by Electronic Information 
Products” in China 
Names and Content Marks of Toxic or 
Hazardous Substances and Elements 
 
Toxic or hazardous substances or elements 
Component 
name 
Lead 
(Pb) 
Mercury
(Hg) 
Cadmium
(Cd) 
Hexavalent 
Chromium
(Cr6+) 
Polybrominated 
Biphenyl 
(PBB) 
Polybrominated 
Diphenyl 
Ethers 
(PBDE) 
Base plate 
assembly
 
×   ○   ○   ○   ○   ○  
Case  ○   ○   ○   ○   ○   ○  
Other   
accessories
 
○   ○   ○   ○   ○   ○  
○ : Indicates that the content of toxic or hazardous substances contained 
in all homogeneous materials for this component is below the standard 
specified in “Requirements for Concentration Limits for Certain 
Hazardous Substances in Electronic Information Products”.   
× : Indicates that the content of toxic or hazardous substances contained 
in at least one homogeneous material for this component is above the 
standard specified in “Requirements for Concentration Limits for Certain 
Hazardous Substances in Electronic Information Produ
cts”.   
Note: This product complies with RoHS Directive.   
The items that does not comply with RoHS Directive are also listed in the 
table above. 
 
TYPE 1 
 





 
277 
Precautions on European Standard Directives
 
1. CE Marking labeled on the inverter is based on Low Voltage Directive.
2. Adaptability to EMC Directive shall be determined in a complete plant equipped 
    with the inverter.
3. Inverter's control circuit terminals are only basically insulated (protection against 
    electric shock I, overvoltage category II, pollution degree 2).
    To meet requirements of CE Marking, final product shall be subject to insulation.
4. Power supply input end of the inverter shall be equipped with protection devices 
    for overcurrent, short circuit and leakage of electricity.
5. Main circuit wiring shall be connected with ring-type compression terminals.
    Main circuit wiring  200V type : (L, N, U, V, W)
                     400V type : (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W) 
6. The inverter is only used for fixed installation, not for other occasions.
7. Adaptability to Low Voltage Directive for the inverter
   1) Protection against Electric Shock: I
   2) Overvoltage category: II
   3) Pollution degree: 2
8. The capacity of relay output terminal mark A, B, C is 30V DC, 0.3A.
9. Make sure to ground the supply neutral. (only 400V-type)





 
278 
Conditions of CE Marking
 
VF200 inverter meets requirements of overvoltage category II stipulated in 
EN 61800-5-1 standard.
A transformer subject to basic insulation shall be installed between inverter and 
power supply.
The insulated transformer shall use the product in compliance with EN standard 
or IEC standard (with basic insulation at least).
Overall system shall meet requirements of overvoltage category III stipulated in
EN 61800-5-1 standard.
According to EMC regulation, the inverter is not an independent operating unit.
The overall system may not be evaluated based on electro magnetic compatibility,
until the overall system is composed of the inverter and device with filter.





 
279 
Warranty 
 
The products and specifications listed in this document are subject to change 
without prior notice as occasioned by the improvements that we introduce into 
our products. Therefore, when you consider the use of the product and place 
orders for the product, you may contact our customer service 
representatives and check that the details listed in this document are 
commensurate with the most up-to-date information.   
We spare no efforts to give utmost care and attention to the quality of this 
product. However, to ensure op
timal performance, we recommend that:   
1) When our product is used beyond the range of the specifications, 
environment or conditions listed herein, or it is used in any environment or 
conditions not listed herein, or when you are considering the use of product 
in any condition or environment that is not specified herein, or when you are 
considering the use of our product for particular purposes for which high 
reliability is required such as safety environment and control systems used 
for the railroad, aviation or medic
al care industries, you should contact our 
customer service representatives and obtain proper specification sheets.   
2) Consult with us for the specifications of your own products, end users, 
environment and conditions of use, installation locations etc. to 
prevent accidents caused by the items not listed herein.   
3) Take safety measures (such as double interlock, etc.) to the external circuit 
of the product to ensure the safety of the whole system in case 
of abnormities caused by product failure
 or external factors; and always use 
this product within its limits and capacity mentioned in this document.   
4) For the product you have purchased from us or with the product delivered to 
your premises, promptly perform an acceptance inspection; for handling of 
our product both before and during the acceptance inspection, give 
full attention to the control and preservation of our product.   
【
Warranty period
】
 
• The warranty period of this product is 3 years from either the date of purchase 
or
 the date on which the product is delivered to the location specified by the 





280
Buyer. 
  However, the warranty period (the so-called “3 years”) shall be valid only until 
42 months from the date of manufacture which includes a maximum of 6-month 
distribution period. 
【Warranty scope】 
• In the event of any failure or obvious defect in the product due to the reasons 
solely attributable to Panasonic Electric Works, Panasonic Electric Works shall 
remedy such malfunctioning or defective product at its own cost in one of the 
following ways: i) repair such product; ii) replac
e such product; iii) supply of 
replacement parts.   
However, the warranty shall not cover the failures or defects arising from any 
of the following reasons. 
1.  Specifications, standards and handling procedures specified by the Buyer. 
2.  Modifications to the structure, performance or specifications performed by a 
party other than the Seller after the date of purchase or the date on which 
the product is delivered. 
3.  Phenomena that could not have been foreseen with the technology that was 
put into practical use a
t or after the time of purchase. 
4. Cases that the range of conditions, circumstances or environment described 
in the manual or specification sheet are exceeded. 
5. Damages that could be avoided if Buyer’s product provides the function and 
structure generally accepted in the industry when this product is 
incorporated into Buyer’s product. 
6. Natural disasters or force majeure. 
7. Consumable goods such as capacitor, cooling fan and relay or 
optional accessories such as cables. 
In addition, the warranty described 
herein shall only cover the single unit 
purchased or delivered by Panasonic Electric Works. Damages arising from 
failures or defects of this product are excluded from this warranty.   
 
 





Revision History 
The manual No. is recorded on the back cover. 
Issue Date  Manual No.  Descriptions of Revision 
2013.01
 
WME-VF200-A
The 1
st
 edition 
 





Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Suzhou Co., Ltd.
No.97, Huoju Road, New District Suzhou, Jiangsu province, China
Phone: +86-512-6843-2580     FAX: +86-512-6843-2590
© Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Suzhou Co., Ltd. 2013





Download Instruction manual of Panasonic VF200 Inverter for Free or View it Online on All-Guides.com.

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 1

1

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 2

2

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 3

3

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 4

4

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 5

5

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 6

6

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 7

7

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 8

8

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 9

9

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 10

10

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 11

11

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 12

12

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 13

13

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 14

14

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 15

15

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 16

16

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 17

17

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 18

18

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 19

19

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 20

20

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 21

21

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 22

22

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 23

23

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 24

24

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 25

25

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 26

26

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 27

27

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 28

28

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 29

29

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 30

30

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 31

31

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 32

32

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 33

33

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 34

34

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 35

35

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 36

36

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 37

37

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 38

38

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 39

39

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 40

40

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 41

41

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 42

42

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 43

43

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 44

44

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 45

45

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 46

46

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 47

47

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 48

48

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 49

49

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 50

50

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 51

51

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 52

52

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 53

53

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 54

54

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 55

55

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 56

56

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 57

57

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 58

58

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 59

59

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 60

60

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 61

61

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 62

62

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 63

63

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 64

64

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 65

65

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 66

66

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 67

67

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 68

68

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 69

69

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 70

70

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 71

71

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 72

72

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 73

73

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 74

74

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 75

75

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 76

76

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 77

77

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 78

78

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 79

79

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 80

80

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 81

81

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 82

82

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 83

83

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 84

84

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 85

85

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 86

86

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 87

87

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 88

88

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 89

89

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 90

90

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 91

91

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 92

92

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 93

93

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 94

94

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 95

95

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 96

96

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 97

97

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 98

98

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 99

99

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 100

100

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 101

101

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 102

102

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 103

103

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 104

104

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 105

105

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 106

106

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 107

107

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 108

108

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 109

109

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 110

110

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 111

111

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 112

112

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 113

113

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 114

114

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 115

115

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 116

116

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 117

117

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 118

118

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 119

119

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 120

120

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 121

121

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 122

122

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 123

123

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 124

124

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 125

125

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 126

126

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 127

127

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 128

128

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 129

129

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 130

130

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 131

131

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 132

132

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 133

133

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 134

134

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 135

135

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 136

136

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 137

137

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 138

138

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 139

139

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 140

140

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 141

141

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 142

142

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 143

143

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 144

144

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 145

145

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 146

146

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 147

147

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 148

148

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 149

149

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 150

150

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 151

151

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 152

152

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 153

153

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 154

154

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 155

155

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 156

156

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 157

157

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 158

158

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 159

159

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 160

160

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 161

161

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 162

162

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 163

163

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 164

164

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 165

165

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 166

166

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 167

167

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 168

168

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 169

169

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 170

170

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 171

171

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 172

172

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 173

173

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 174

174

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 175

175

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 176

176

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 177

177

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 178

178

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 179

179

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 180

180

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 181

181

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 182

182

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 183

183

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 184

184

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 185

185

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 186

186

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 187

187

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 188

188

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 189

189

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 190

190

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 191

191

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 192

192

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 193

193

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 194

194

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 195

195

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 196

196

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 197

197

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 198

198

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 199

199

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 200

200

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 201

201

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 202

202

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 203

203

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 204

204

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 205

205

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 206

206

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 207

207

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 208

208

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 209

209

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 210

210

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 211

211

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 212

212

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 213

213

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 214

214

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 215

215

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 216

216

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 217

217

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 218

218

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 219

219

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 220

220

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 221

221

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 222

222

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 223

223

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 224

224

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 225

225

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 226

226

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 227

227

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 228

228

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 229

229

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 230

230

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 231

231

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 232

232

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 233

233

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 234

234

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 235

235

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 236

236

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 237

237

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 238

238

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 239

239

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 240

240

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 241

241

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 242

242

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 243

243

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 244

244

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 245

245

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 246

246

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 247

247

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 248

248

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 249

249

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 250

250

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 251

251

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 252

252

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 253

253

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 254

254

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 255

255

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 256

256

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 257

257

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 258

258

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 259

259

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 260

260

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 261

261

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 262

262

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 263

263

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 264

264

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 265

265

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 266

266

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 267

267

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 268

268

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 269

269

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 270

270

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 271

271

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 272

272

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 273

273

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 274

274

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 275

275

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 276

276

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 277

277

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 278

278

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 279

279

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 280

280

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 281

281

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 282

282

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 283

283

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 284

284

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 285

285

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 286

286

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 287

287

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 288

288

Panasonic VF200 Instruction manual - Page 289

289

VF200

WME-VF200-A

2013.01

panasonic.net/id/pidsx/global

Ошибки частотных преобразователей: примеры и коды ошибок

Частотные преобразователи — это электронные или электротехнические устройства, предназначенные для изменения и регулировки частоты электрического напряжения. Сфера их использования очень широка: насосные станции, системы тепло- и водоснабжения, линии производства, конвейеры, лифты, центрифуги, мельницы, металлургические агрегаты, буровое оборудование и т. д.

Использование частотных преобразователей на промышленных объектах дает следующие преимущества:

  • Возможность отказаться от регулирующего оборудования: дросселей, вариаторов, редукторов и др. Это существенно упрощает работу механической системы, снижает расходы на эксплуатацию и повышает ее надежность.
  • Плавный разгон управляемого двигателя, защищающий его от механических ударов и пусковых токов, что продлевает срок его службы.
  • Частотные преобразователи в паре с асинхронными двигателями можно использовать в качестве альтернативы для приводов постоянного тока.
  • Максимально рациональное регулирование скорости контролируемых двигателей и связанных с этим технологических процедур.
  • Экономия электроэнергии, благодаря устранению ее неоправданных трат.

Но, несмотря на свою надежность и эффективность, частотные преобразователи, как и любые электронные приборы, подвержены износу. Инженерная компания 555 специализируется на ремонте промышленной электроники, и в частности — на устранении ошибок частотных преобразователей. Наши специалисты готовы отремонтировать вышедшее из строя оборудование в кратчайшие сроки.

Основные виды и причины неисправностей

Опознать неисправности частотников позволяют коды ошибок, высвечивающиеся на мониторе устройства. Каждая такая комбинация символов указывает на совершенно конкретную проблему, и это помогает специалистам выработать правильную стратегию ремонта. Для начала рассмотрим типовые виды ошибок частотных преобразователей:

  1. Over Current или OC. Данный сигнал на мониторе устройства свидетельствует о его перегрузке. Если подобная проблема возникла при тестовом запуске, необходимо проверить соответствие токов регулятора и электрической машины, а также исправность электроцепей управляемого двигателя. Следует учесть, что некоторые модели частотников высвечивают ошибку Over Current при торможении, работе и запуске электродвигателя.
  2. Over Heat или ОН. Это сообщение указывает на превышение номинально допустимой температуры частотного преобразователя. Проще говоря — на его перегрев. Устранить проблему можно посредством чистки внутреннего вентилятора или установки дополнительной вентиляционной системы в бокс, где располагается преобразователь. В качестве профилактики следует размещать частотник в месте, гарантирующем эффективный отвод тепла.
  3. Over Load или OL. Такая ошибка преобразователя может быть вызвана двумя обстоятельствами: превышением на валу момента силы или перегревом управляемого двигателя. Чтобы устранить проблему, необходимо выполнить корректную настройку тепловой защиты. Для этого во время программирования устройства нужно задать требуемую величину тока и время срабатывания защитной функции.
  4. Low Voltage или LV. Ошибка высвечивается при снижении напряжения питания или обрыве фаз (одной или двух). Существует два варианта решения этой проблемы: «насильственная» остановка двигателя или настройка его работы в однофазном режиме.
  5. Over Voltage или OV. Такую надпись можно увидеть на мониторе при замедлении вращения двигателя. Для устранения неисправности необходимо воспользоваться одним из трех способов: переводом устройства в режим генератора, активацией тормозного резистора или перенастройкой системы защиты от повышенного напряжения.

Среди других типовых неисправностей преобразователя следует выделить вращение двигателя в неправильном направлении, невозможность его запуска, проблемы с торможением и разгоном и т. д. Каждое повреждение имеет под собой конкретные причины. Например, если двигатель разгоняется очень медленно, скорее всего, дело в срабатывании функции токоограничения в момент разгона.

В число наиболее распространенных причин неисправностей входят:

  1. Заводской брак. Как правило, фабричные дефекты дают о себе знать в течение гарантийного срока. Поэтому для их устранения следует обращаться к поставщику или в брендовый сервисный центр.
  2. Ошибки при монтаже. Чаще всего причиной неисправностей становится некорректная сборка схемы привода или установка частотника в неподходящем месте.
  3. Нарушение норм эксплуатации. Регламент технического обслуживания изложен в инструкции, прилагаемой к устройству. Игнорирование регламента может привести к выходу из строя полупроводниковых элементов, перегреванию частотного регулятора и другим неисправностям.
  4. Несоответствие частотного преобразователя условиям его эксплуатации. Основные критерии выбора частотника — электрические характеристики двигателя, исполнение, набор функций и т. д. Несоответствие параметров условиям его эксплуатации приводит к некорректной работе устройства, выходу из строя и многочисленным поломкам.

Теперь поговорим об ошибках преобразователя частоты более подробно и предметно. В качестве примера рассмотрим привод известного китайского бренда INVT ELECTRIC CO, серии GDXXX. Предлагаем вашему вниманию таблицу, в которой представлены коды ошибок устройства, их расшифровка, вероятные причины неисправностей, а также способы их устранения.

Код ошибки Расшифровка Вероятные причины Способы устранения
OUt1, 2, 3 Ошибка фазы. Отсутствие заземления или контакта при подсоединении кабеля; слишком маленькое время разгона. Увеличение времени разгона;
замена модуля IGBT; устранение неисправностей внешнего оборудования; переподключение кабеля.
OC1, 2, 3 Токовая перегрузка при разгоне, торможении или постоянной скорости. Чрезмерное время торможения или разгона; слишком высокое напряжение в сети; недостаточная мощность привода;
потеря фазы или короткое замыкание «на землю»; воздействие внешнего фактора.
Сокращение времени разгона;
оптимизация питающего напряжения;
приобретение привода с более высокой мощностью; проверка конфигурации выхода;
устранение внешних помех.
OV1, 2, 3 Сверхнапряжение при разгоне, торможении или постоянной скорости. Напряжение на входе не соответствует параметрам привода;
чрезмерная энергия торможения.
Проверка входного напряжения;
оптимизация времени торможения/разгона.
UV Слишком низкое напряжение шины. Пониженное напряжение питания. Проверка и оптимизация входного напряжения.
OL1 Перегрузка электродвигателя. Слишком низкое питающее напряжение;
неверно заданные параметры тока;
чрезмерная нагрузка на электродвигатель.
Проверка входного напряжения;
настройка правильных параметров тока в двигателе;
оптимизация нагрузки.
OL2 Перегрузка преобразователя частоты. Чрезмерно быстрый разгон;
остановка двигателя;
заниженное питающее напряжение;
сверхнагрузка;
длительная работа двигателя на низкой скорости.
Увеличение времени разгона;
снижение нагрузки на двигатель;
проверка мощности двигателя и входного напряжения;
приобретение привода с более высокой мощностью;
замена двигателя.
OL3 Перегрузка по электричеству. Сигнализация перегрузки в соответствии с заданными параметрами. Проверка нагрузки и точки перегрузки.
SPI Потеря фаз входа. Потеря колебания или фазы напряжения трех входных фаз. Проверка и оптимизация входного напряжения и/или правильности монтажа.
SPO Потеря фаз выхода. Асимметричная нагрузка. Проверка выхода, двигателя и кабеля.
OH1 Перегревание выпрямителя. Неисправность вентилятора или засорение вентиляционного канала;
слишком высокая температура воздуха в помещении;
чрезмерно затянутый запуск устройства.
Замена вентилятора и проверка воздуховода;
снижение температуры окружающей среды;
проверка и восстановление воздухообмена;
оптимизация мощности нагрузки;
замена модуля IGBT;
ремонт платы управления.
EF Неисправность внешних элементов. Повреждение клеммы SIn и/или других внешних клемм. Замена пришедших в негодность клемм.
CE Проблемы со связью. Некорректная скорость в бодах;
повреждение кабеля связи;
неверно заданный адрес сообщения;
серьезные помехи в кабеле.
Оптимизация скорости в бодах;
проверка кабеля связи;
настройка правильного адреса сообщения;
замена кабеля или оптимизация защиты от помех.
ItE Проблемы с обнаружением тока. Некорректное подключение платы управления;
отсутствие вспомогательного напряжения;
выход из строя индикаторов тока.
Проверка разъема, датчиков и платы управления.
tE Ошибка автоматической настройки. Несоответствие мощностей двигателя и частотного преобразователя;
неверно заданные параметры электродвигателя;
серьезная разница между стандартными параметрами и параметрами автоматической настройки;
выход времени на автонастройку.
Установка параметров, указанных на шильдике двигателя;
снижение нагрузки на двигатель;
проверка параметров двигателя и его соединения;
установка верхнего предела частоты на уровень «выше 2/3 номинальной частоты».
bCE Неисправность тормозного модуля. Разрыв тормозных коммуникаций или некорректная работа тормозной цепи;
недостаток производительности внешнего тормозного резистора.
Проверка тормозного модуля и замена тормозных кабелей;
принудительное повышение мощности тормозного резистора.
ETH1, 2 Короткое замыкание Замыкание выхода преобразователя частоты «на землю»;
неисправность в цепи определения тока.
Проверка подключения двигателя и индикаторов тока;
замена платы управления.
dEu Отклонение скоростного режима. Избыточная нагрузка. Оптимизация нагрузки и увеличение времени обнаружения;
проверка и при необходимости корректировка параметров управления.
STo Несогласованность параметров. Отсутствие параметров управления для синхронных электродвигателей;
некорректно заданные параметры автоматической настройки;
отсутствие подключения частотника к двигателю.
Корректировка нагрузки на двигатель;
установка корректных параметров управления;
увеличение времени определения несогласованности.
PCE Обрыв связи с блоком управления. Повреждение проводов, обеспечивающих подключение к блоку управления;
помехи в проводах, связанные с внешним фактором;
некорректное функционирование цепи в основной плате и/или в клавиатуре.
Замена проводов блока управления;
проверка внешней среды и устранение источника помех;
выполнение комплексного сервисного обслуживания устройства.
END Сброс времени до заводских настроек. Фактическое время функционирования преобразователя не соответствует внутреннему параметру продолжительности работы. Корректировка настроек времени.
DNE Проблема с загрузкой параметров. Повреждение проводов, подключаемых к блоку управления;
помехи в проводах;
ошибка в базе данных панели управления.
Замена проводов блока управления;
сервисное обслуживание частотного преобразователя;
повторная загрузка данных в панель управления.

Преимущества ремонта в инженерной компании 555

  • Огромный опыт в ремонте частотных преобразователей разных моделей и марок.
  • Команда профессиональных специалистов.
  • Экономия до 70 % средств по сравнению с приобретением нового оборудования.
  • Оперативное выполнение работ (максимальный срок ремонта — 15 дней).
  • Бесплатная консультация и предварительный осмотр для определения ремонтопригодности привода.
  • Доступные цены и оплата только по результату работы.
  • Гарантия на отремонтированное оборудование — 12 месяцев.

Обращайтесь к нам из любой точки России, через сайт или по телефону. Промышленная электроника — это очень сложное и специфичное оборудование, которое следует доверять только профессионалам.

Мы ремонтируем:

Компания ООО «Барс-Гидравлик Групп»

Компания ООО «Барс-Гидравлик Групп» на протяжении нескольких лет успешно сотрудничает с ООО «Инженерная компания 555» в вопросах ремонта сложного промышленного оборудования. За время работы наш партнер зарекомендовал себя с самой лучшей стороны. Заказы выполняются в кротчайшие сроки при соблюдении высокого качества работ. Организация приема и выдачи заказов четкая. Гарантийные обязательства выполняются в полном объеме.

Выражаем благодарность Вашим специалистам за профессионализм и оперативное решение поставленных задач.

Особенно хочется отметить высокую клиентоориентированность персонала Вашей компании, готовность помочь в самых сложных ситуациях.

Мы высоко ценим сложившиеся между нашими компаниями открытые и доверительные партнерские отношения и искренне желаем «Инженерной компании «555» долгих лет успеха и процветания.

Читать весь
отзыв

ООО «СоюзМашМеталл»

ООО «Инженерная компания «555» оказывала нашей компании услуги по ремонту электродвигателей и проявила пунктуальность, аккуратность и ответственность в работе.

Результат выполненных работ говорит о качественном оборудовании и высококвалифицированных кадрах.

Сотрудники компании готовы выполнить новые для себя виды работ и оказать консультационные услуги, что характеризует их как профессионалов своего дела.

Рекомендуем ООО «ИК «555» как ответственного и надежного поставщика услуг.

Читать весь
отзыв

ООО «РСК»

Сообщаем, что наша организация сотрудничает с ООО «Инженерная компания «555» с мая 2016 года по настоящее время.

За этот период мы обращались к услугам компании более 10 раз.

Благодаря серьезному и квалифицированному подходу сотрудников ООО «Инженерная компания «555» ремонтные работы произведены качественно с учетом сроков, и обеспечены гарантийным сопровождением.

Планируем в дальнейшем работать с ООО «Инженерная компания «555»

Читать весь
отзыв

ОАО «Октябрьский электровагоноремонтный завод»

Уважаемый Дмитрий Васильевич!

ОАО «Октябрьский электровагоноремонтный завод» успешно работает с ООО «Инженерная компания «555» несколько лет, очень довольны данным сотрудничеством. В работе компании наибольшую ценность для нас представляет готовность работать на условиях, удобных Заказчику, качественный ремонт оборудования в заявленные сроки и самое главное, финансовая защищенность Заказчика. В инженерной компании работают внимательные, доброжелательные сотрудники, готовые в любой момент решить проблему Заказчика. Мы рады, что выбрали ООО «Инженерная компания «555» в качестве партнера. Гарантируем дальнейшее сотрудничество!

Читать весь
отзыв

ЗАО «ОХТИНСКОЕ»

ЗАО «Охтинское» выражает глубокую признательность и истинную благодарность ООО Инженерной компании «555» за качественную работу компании по ремонту сложного оборудования промышленной электроники, оперативность и технически грамотное отношение к работе в течении всего периода сотрудничества.

Мы надеемся на дальнейшее успешное развитие деловых отношений в сфере ремонта промышленной электроники.

Читать весь
отзыв

Преимущества сотрудничества с нами

Оплата только за результат — работающий блок

Гарантия на работоспособность блока целиком 12 месяцев

Срок ремонта от 5 до 15 дней

Бесплатный предварительный осмотр на предмет ремонтопригодности

Не вносим конструктивных изменений

Ремонт на компонентном уровне

Наша лаборатория расположена в Санкт-Петербурге, но обратиться за помощью вы можете из любой точки России.
Закажите обратный звонок или наберите в рабочее время многоканальный телефон

+7 (800) 555-89-01 (звонок по России бесплатный).

Расскажите о своей проблеме и получите инструкцию к дальнейшим действиям.

Панель оператора для ПЧ Siemens

В процессе эксплуатации преобразователя частоты (ПЧ) рано или поздно возникают проблемы, связанные с его корректной работой. Ошибки и сбои могут происходить как при включении (настройке) частотника, так и при его эксплуатации.

При возникновении большинства ошибок преобразователь прекращает работу. Реакцию на некоторые ошибки можно программировать. Например, при возникновении сбоя ПЧ может останавливаться либо продолжать работать, выдав сообщение о неисправности. В некоторых частотных преобразователях существует так называемый «пожарный режим», когда ПЧ работает, несмотря на проблемы, вплоть до поломки и возгорания.

Для начала рассмотрим типичные сообщения об авариях и ошибках ПЧ, которые отображаются на экране пользователя. Отметим, что большинство этих сообщений передаются по каналу связи (если он присутствует) в контроллер и соответствующим образом обрабатываются.

1. Перегрузка по току

Код на дисплее: OC (Over Current). Это сообщение говорит о том, что выходной ток преобразователя частоты превысил допустимое значение. Если данная ошибка появилась при первом пуске ПЧ, необходимо проверить соответствие номинального тока частотника номинальному и реальному току двигателя – возможно, произошло замыкание внутри двигателя. В некоторых типах ПЧ перегрузка OC может разделяться на 3 разных ошибки – перегрузка по току при разгоне, при торможении, при работе на постоянной скорости.

2. Перегрузка

Код на дисплее: OL (Over Load). Данное сообщение связано с предыдущим и в некоторой степени дублирует его. Сообщение OL может высвечиваться из-за срабатывания внутренней электронной тепловой защиты двигателя, либо из-за превышения механической нагрузки на двигатель (превышения момента). Уровень перегрузки устанавливается при настройке частотного преобразователя, причем задаются как уровень тока (в амперах или процентах), так и время реакции в секундах.

3. Превышение напряжения

Код на дисплее: OV (Over Voltage). Это сообщение появляется, когда напряжение на звене постоянного тока превышает допустимый порог. В первую очередь данная ошибка возникает во время торможения, когда электродвигатель входит в режим генерации электроэнергии. Эту проблему можно решить несколькими способами – увеличить время торможения, применить тормозной резистор, отключить торможение (остановка двигателя на свободном выбеге), поднять предельный уровень ограничения перенапряжения при наличии соответствующей возможности.

4. Низкое напряжение

Код на дисплее: LV (Low Voltage). Данное сообщение может появиться, когда напряжение на звене постоянного тока падает ниже установленного порога. Возможные причины: пониженное напряжение в сети, пропадание одной из фаз. К слову, частотный преобразователь может продолжать работать без одной или даже двух фаз, если подключенный двигатель допускает работу на пониженной мощности и отключено обнаружение пропадания фазы.

5. Перегрев ПЧ

Код на дисплее: OH (Over Heat). Это сообщение говорит о том, что температура ПЧ слишком высока. В первую очередь следует проверить исправность внутренних вентиляторов преобразователя и прочистить его сжатым воздухом. Также необходимо проверить отвод тепла от ПЧ, температуру и циркуляцию воздуха внутри электрошкафа. Возможно, потребуется установить дополнительное охлаждение или уменьшить нагрузку.

Мы перечислили лишь основные сообщения о неисправностях. Их число может доходить до нескольких десятков, что позволяет точнее настраивать работу преобразователя и диагностировать неисправности. В различных моделях ПЧ эти сообщения могут индицироваться по-разному, например, в частотнике ProStar PR6000 они выглядят как Er01, Er02, и т.д., но смысл имеют аналогичный.

При ряде неисправностей преобразователей частоты сообщения на экране не выводятся. В основном, это связано с проблемами питания или с фатальными сбоями в работе ПЧ. Кроме того, если существуют проблемы с первоначальным запуском, то есть вероятность ошибки в подключении цепей управления (запуска). Рассмотрим подробнее такие неисправности.

6. Двигатель не запускается

Шаг 1. Проверяем подключение питания и электродвигателя. Шаг 2. Проверяем цепи запуска. В некоторых моделях ПЧ для запуска двигателя необходимо активировать более одного входа, например, «Пуск» и «Вперед», а также вход разрешения работы. Шаг 3. Проверяем способ задания частоты. Проще всего активировать и задать скорость вращения в панели управления, а затем, после устранения проблем, переключиться на задание скорости с внешнего источника.

7. Двигатель вращается в неправильном направлении

Чаще всего в приводах используется «правое» вращение двигателя. Изменить направление вращения можно двумя способами.

  • Аппаратный способ. Необходимо поменять любые две фазы питания двигателя на выходе ПЧ.
  • Программный способ. Необходимо изменить направление вращения в соответствующем меню («Forward/Reverse»).

8. Двигатель не вращается с нужной скоростью

Причиной может быть неверное задание частоты, либо слишком большая нагрузка на двигатель (при неправильной уставке защиты). Также существует вероятность неверной установки значений верхней и нижней границ выходной частоты.

9. Проблемы с разгоном и торможением

Если двигатель слишком медленно разгоняется, и время разгона существенно превышает установленное, есть вероятность, что срабатывает функция токоограничения при разгоне. Если же двигатель слишком долго тормозит, то необходимо проверить в меню преобразователя настройки такого параметра, как ограничение перенапряжения, и убедиться в правильности подключения тормозного резистора.

10. Слишком большой ток и температура двигателя

Перегрев электродвигателя является следствием чрезмерной нагрузки на его валу. Следует принять меры по защите двигателя и частотного преобразователя путем настройки соответствующих параметров через меню.

В общем случае при возникновении неисправностей в работе преобразователя частоты следует обратить внимание на температуру двигателя и сообщения на экране, а также обратиться к руководству по эксплуатации.

Другие полезные материалы:
Выбор преобразователя частоты
Назначение сетевых и моторных дросселей
Использование тормозных резисторов с ПЧ

Артикул «Минимакс» 1101013319

Преобразователь частоты Panasonic Inverter VF 200 AVF200-0072

Все характеристики

Артикул «Минимакс» 1101013319
Единица измерения шт
Тип изделия Преобразователь частоты
Вес, кг 1,40


Отзывы

Преобразователь частоты Panasonic Inverter VF 200 AVF200-0072

На данной странице представлена продукция из ассортимента компании «Минимакс» — Преобразователь частоты Panasonic Inverter VF 200 AVF200-0072. Вы можете ознакомиться с описанием и техническими характеристиками, а также увидеть информацию о наличии на складе и актуальной цене.

Данный товар относится к группе товаров «Частотные преобразователи, устройства плавного пуска», в которой вы сможете при желании подобрать аналог, если Преобразователь частоты Panasonic Inverter VF 200 AVF200-0072 по каким-то причинам вам не подходит.

При необходимости Вы можете связаться с нами для получения более подробной информации об интересующей позиции каталога.

Если у вас есть потребность купить данный товар, просто положите его в корзину и оформите заказ. Для оптовых покупателей действуют скидки.

Частотный преобразователь предназначен для плавного изменения скорости и момента, а также он помогает избавиться от пусковых токов. В процессе преобразования постоянного тока в переменный инвертор создает волны переменного тока (синусоидальной, квадратной или любой другой формы). Как всякий стабильный источник питания он должен оставаться способным поставлять достаточно тока для поддержания мощности системы.

Все производители стремятся уменьшить размеры приводов, а потому размещение компонентов и плат в устройстве всё более уплотняется. Это не остаётся бесследным и приводит в какой-то степени к отказам силового оборудования. Необходимо отметить, что ремонт частотников (Р4,0-7,5 кВт) практически нецелесообразен при выходе из строя управляющей части системы. Построение аппарата (свыше 100 кВт) по модульному принципу сильно упрощает функциональную схемуи увеличивает срок службы.

Главный фактор, определяющий срок службы частотника и его бесперебойную эксплуатацию, заключается в своевременных проверках иправильном обслуживании. Кроме всего прочего электронное устройство само по себе является достаточно сложным, поэтому при эксплуатации силового оборудования с ним возникают потенциальные проблемы.

Частотники являются очень чувствительной аппаратурой за счет высокого уровня исполнительских компонентов (если даже не вдаваться в технические детали). Наиболее распространенная проблема преобразовательных устройств — это программное обеспечение. Чем больше добавленных возможностей, тем вполне вероятнее могут возникнуть потенциальные проблемы.

Обычно, починка таких устройств для пользователя обходится довольно дорого. Поэтому некоторые неисправности можно устранить самостоятельно. На самом деле, нет ничего проще, чем взять в руки инструкцию «Коды ошибок преобразователей частоты OMRON» (название взято для примера), и расшифровать сигнализирующие записи с помощью таблицы предупреждений и ошибок. Рассмотрим наиболее распространенные из них.

Содержание

  1. Неполадки и пути их исправления
  2. Замена резистора
  3. Сигнализация ошибок
  4. Электродвигатель не трогается с места
  5. Ремонт частотных преобразователей – алгоритм мероприятий
  6. Ремонт
  7. Ремонтировать самостоятельно или обратиться в сервис?

Неполадки и пути их исправления

Система охлаждения на моделях особенно чувствительна. Можно сказать, это одна из болевых точек механизма. Для того, чтобы максимально увеличить срок эксплуатации частотника следует хотя бы один раз в месяц делать продувание(сжатым воздухом) радиатора охлаждения, расположенного сзади корпуса. Лучше будет, если продуть корпус целиком, ведьвнутри инвертора скапливается всегда очень много пыли.

Продувание радиатора требуется, поскольку на нём крепится IGBT-ключ, через который осуществляется управление электрическим мотором. С выделением тепла радиатор капитально нагревается. Поломка может повлечь за собой перегорание полупроводникового прибора.

Часто на корпусе и радиаторе устанавливаются воздушные вентиляторы с принудительным охлаждением. Периодически их нужно проверять на работоспособность. В случае необходимой замены их несложно найти в продаже. В настоящее время ассортимент этой техники довольно широк и разнообразен.

Частый заряд и разряд, а также повышенная температура со временем приводят к старению электролитических конденсаторов частотника, что уменьшает их номинальную емкость или способствует возникновению внутренних межполюсных пробоев. В результате возможно вздутие или разрушение конденсаторов.

Замена резистора

Регулирование преобразователем частоты может осуществляться как посредством контроллера, так и вручную. Зачастую в неисправное состояние приходит потенциометр (или по-другому резистор). Управлениепроисходит двумя способами:

  • с внешнего потенциометра;
  • с выносной панельки инвертора.

Для смены неисправного внешнего нужно переключить в настроечном меню частотного преобразователя на опцию регулировки с выносной панельки. Также возможно самому поменять резистор. Параметры резистора и все необходимые операции подробно описываются в инструкции к аппарату.

Сигнализация ошибок

Зачастую возникают предупреждения и ошибки на дисплее устройства при запуске, хотя до остановки их не было. Как правило, после проверки кабелей и протяжек клемм сигнализация об ошибках исчезает. На большинстве моделях это расшифровывается как ошибка при перегрузке. Если один раз в три месяца делать протяжку всех клеммных соединений, такие неприятные ситуации могут вообще не возникать.

Еще одним распространенным слабым местом является то, что при регулировке частотным преобразователем с внешней выносной панельки пропадает управление. Вопреки возникающему ощущению о неисправностивсего аппарата, если просто проверить присоединение кабеля и винтов штекера в разъеме, проблема устраняется.

Электродвигатель не трогается с места

Наиболее серьезная неисправность, требующая замены либо починки частотного преобразователя. При выдаче ошибки о том, что двигатель не трогается с места, могут быть две причины:

  • выход из строя электромотора;
  • повреждение системы управления. Здесь не обойтись без разборки инвертора и замены электронной платы.

Неисправности частотного преобразователя

Если самому это сделать сложно, необходимо проконсультироваться с авторизованным сервисным центром для лучшего результата (официального поставщика компании, в нашем случае, OMRON). Иногда бывает проще приобрести новый преобразователь частоты.

При любой неисправности, прежде всего, следует проверить работоспособность электрического мотора, целостность кабельной проводки и клеммных зажимов. А уже после этого разбираться в самом устройстве. А также следует неукоснительно придерживаться правил техники безопасности и всегда помнить про профилактические работына протяжении всей жизнедеятельности аппарата.

Ремонт частотных преобразователей – алгоритм мероприятий

Наладка преобразовательного устройства осуществляется с помощью применения высокочастотных осциллографов. Работу частотника проверяютв трёх возможных режимах, это:

  • в номинальном режиме;
  • на холостом ходу;
  • при максимально допустимой перегрузке.

Невключение тиристоров (транзисторов) частника либо разрыв в силовой цепи определяется по форме выходного напряжения преобразователя. После чего в тиристорном блоке устанавливается выбранный по нужным параметрам тиристор на смену вышедшего из строя.

Ремонт

Наладка системы управления частотником выполняется путём подачи на него питающего напряжения без силового напряжения. Осциллограф позволяет проверить соответствие длительности импульсов, подаваемых на инвертор, указанной в паспорте. В случае искажения сигналов соответствующие элементы системы подвергаются снятию и замене.

Для функционирования современных частотных преобразователей используются интегральные микросхемы. При ремонте и наладке систем помимо осциллографов и тестеров применяется специальная аппаратура.

После капитального ремонта аппарат следует включить в работу на холостом ходу. Затем, если все нормально, запустить инвертор с электродвигателем на холостом ходу, но без его нагрузки. В работе по такому режиму важно проверить отсутствие перегрева элементов привода. Завершающий контроль работы привода проводится при номинальном значении нагрузки двигателя.

После наладки техники иногда требуется прийти к определённому соотношению величин напряжения и частоты. При этом номинал частоты должен соответствовать номиналу напряжения. Для правильной настройки ЭДС следует выполнить такие операции как:

  • измерение коэффициента трансформации трансформатора напряжения и активного сопротивления статора электродвигателя;
  • расчёт падения напряжения, равного произведению величин активного сопротивления статора на номинальный ток двигателя, разделённому на коэффициент трансформации.
  • в итоге, напряжение, снимаемое с отвода резистора, подсоединённого параллельно вторичной обмотке трансформатора, должно быть равным вычисленному значению.

Неисправность в силовой схеме может возникать в результате резких колебаний в системе инвертор—двигатель. Устранение подобных колебаний достигается регулированием резистора блока управления.

Ремонтировать самостоятельно или обратиться в сервис?

Периодическая проверка и техническое обслуживание помогут предотвратить ряд проблем, но, тем не менее преобразователи частоты выходят из строя, и этого нельзя избежать полностью. При серьёзной поломке требуется диагностика техники. Самым ответственным мероприятием считается поиск повреждённых деталей. Ведь случается, приходится искать плавающую неисправность, когда она возникает периодически при определенных условиях или просто хаотично.

В мастерской вам проведут квалифицированную диагностику, включающую в себя главным образом: считывание кодов ошибок, определение вышедших из строя узлов. Будьте готовы заплатить за ремонт.

Ремонт в мастерской – отличное решение, специалисты быстро определят слабые места, и дорогостоящий аппарат еще послужит вам не один год. Ведь бывают случаи, когда пользовательское вмешательство в устройство ухудшало состояние прибора и приводило к окончательной поломке.Если неприятность произошла в период гарантийного обслуживания, то однозначно за помощью лучше обратиться в сервис.

Частотный преобразователь на логических элементах

0 0 голоса
Рейтинг статьи
Подписаться
Уведомить о
guest

0 комментариев
Старые
Новые Популярные
Межтекстовые Отзывы
Посмотреть все комментарии

А вот еще интересные материалы:

  • Яшка сломя голову остановился исправьте ошибки
  • Ясность цели позволяет целеустремленно добиваться намеченного исправьте ошибки
  • Ясность цели позволяет целеустремленно добиваться намеченного где ошибка
  • Частотный преобразователь ошибка е05
  • Частотный преобразователь ошибка rdy